Home

1756-UM058C-EN-P, ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual

Contents

1. LA TAN A TAN Owner controller ControlNet Bridge module ControlNet Bridge module Input module 2 T A 4 5 1 Bee t sie H I Q Q B a Input data multicast in re He module s chassis at RPI E at S S Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Input data at least as often as RPI ControINet 40947 The reserved spot on the network and the module s RPI are asynchronous to each other This means there are Best and Worst Case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated channel data from the module in a networked chassis Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the Best Case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast with updated channel data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remotely located owner receives the data almost immediately Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 13 Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the Worst Case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the owner controller will not receive data until the next available network slot IMPORTANT Enabling the COS feature on an input module in a remote chassis allows the module to multicast data at both the RPI rate and when the input c
2. DC INPUT AC INPUT ST 01234567 3 8 stgg 111111 ST012345670 Q b2e3 4 gt ST 89 WULBU K 11112222 767890123 A 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3T45 678901 20945 LED indicators for output modules Table 8 B Status Indicators for Output M odules LED This display Means Take this action indicators OK Steady green light The outputs are actively None being controlled by a system processor OK Flashing green light The module has passed None internal diagnostics but is not actively controlled or it is inhibited OK Flashing red light Previously established Check controller and communication has timed chassis communication out OK Steady red light The module must be Replace the module replaced I O State Yellow The output is active None I O Fuse Red A short overload fault has Check wiring for short occurred for a point in overload this group Check the module properties in RSLogix 5000 and reset the fuse 0 Fault Red A fault has occurred for this Check this point at the point controller Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Troubleshooting Your M odule 1 0 Fuse 1756 0A16 1756 0A16l gt AC OUTPUT ST01234567 LLFUSE E E ST 89 0ULBUBD FUSE E gt AC OUTPUT 3 w ST 89 WuRBUE 1756 0A8D 1756 OA8E G gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST01234567 Fir01234567
3. single RTB terminal When wire Group 1 N 25 M z 27 you daisy chain to other N 27 E o 29 RTBs always connect the a2 a daisy chain as shown Wa 3 This wiring example shows N 36 35 a single voltage source If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage DC COM 42573 Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V DC INPUT in i st01234567 8 OS 111111 9 S ST 89 912345 11112222 O ST 67890123 6 ere ere re 45678901 ControlBus Display Interface 42842 M 30082 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 27 1756 1V32 Specifications Number of Inputs 32 16 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 120mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 66W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 4 1W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 14 BTU hr 60 C On State Voltage Range 10 30V dc Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc ON State Current 10V dc 2mA 30V dc 3 5mA Maximum Off State Voltage 5V dc M aximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 30V dc 8 6kQ Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter Oms 1ms or 2ms 1ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms 2ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of state
4. 0 41682 IMPORTANT The depth from front of the module to the back of the chassis is as follows standard depth housing 147 91mm 5 823in extended depth housing 157 43mm 6 198in Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 5 10 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module Installing the Removable Install the RTB onto the module to connect wiring Terminal Block ATTENTION Shock hazard exists If the RTB is installed onto the module while the field side power is applied the RTB will be electrically live Do not touch the RTB s terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before installing the RTB onto the module Before installing the RTB make certain e field side wiring of the RTB has been completed e the RTB housing is snapped into place on the RTB e the RTB housing door is closed e the locking tab at the top of the module is unlocked 1 Align the top bottom and left side guides of the RTB with the guides on the module 0 6 By By SN WEN EAN EN TEAN EAN Lo SSIS y is
5. 40175 M Simplified schematic L1 0 Surge Current Chart LED indicator Control Bus 45V MW Interface x fo x co J Y S _ AC OUTPUT LI t j Sis Fused per group a Surge Per group ST01234567 3 Display J 20A FUSE I ae j Per group ST 89 WULBUS IL AY 5A FUSE H ep A 2A TE OUT 0 0 5A Control Bus Interface 30341 M Time ams 40853 M 40458 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 29 1756 0A16 Specifications Number of Outputs 16 8 points common M odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 400mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 2 1W M ax Power Dissipation M odule 6 5W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 22 17 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Poi 0 5A maximum 60 C Per Group 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 4A maximum 60 C Surge Current Per Poi 5A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Per Group 15A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V 0 5A 5 7V load current lt 50mA Max Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA 0 2V us for loads lt S0mA Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3m
6. DIAGNOSTIC gt AC OUTPUT ST01234567 go FUSE0 1234567 K 1756 0B16E ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 1756 0B16l gt DC OUTPUT 3 ST01234567 FUSE E ST 89 DURBUB y FUSE E ELECTRONICALLY FUSED gt DC OUTPUT 1756 OB8 OC8 OHS 8 ST 01234567 sT 89 buURBUE K 1756 OB8EI gt DC OUTPUT The following LED indicators are used with output modules 1756 OA8 ON8 gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST012345670 K 1756 0B16D G gt DC OUTPUT sT 01234567 3 FLT 01234567 H ST 89 DWURBUB FLT 89 WNLRBU5 DIAGNOSTIC 1756 0B32 DC OUTPUT st01234567 Riper ST 89 912345 8 ql1112222 67890123 sq22222233 45678901 1756 OW16l 3 ST01234567 JE K 6 DC OUTPUT 3 ST012345670 FUSE 01234567 K ELECTRONICALLY FUSED RELAY OUTPUT 1756 OX8I 3 ST 01234567 sT 89 ULB RELAY OUTPUT 5T012345670 KO 6 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 8 4 Troubleshooting Your M odule Using RSLogix 5000 to In o T vee ai on a module ee 5000 aah you to fault and other conditions Yo
7. Module Fault Word i 1 tl 4 All modules A communications fault sets all bits in the M odule Fault Word A Fuse Blown Field Power Loss No Load or Output Verify condition sets the appropriate bit in the M odule Fault Word Group 1 Group 0 Fuse Blown Word a Point Level Group Level 1 1756 0A8E 1756 0A16 1756 OB8El 1756 OB16E A blown fuse for any point group sets the bit for that 1756 OV16E point group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets the appropriate bit bits in the M odule Fault Word Group1 Group 0 ees Field Pow er Loss Word 1 1756 OA8E only 41457 A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the Field Power Loss Word and also sets the appropriate bits in the M odule Fault W ord Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 21 Cha pter Summary and In this chapter you leamed about What s Next e determining input module compatibility e determining output module compatibility e using features common to ControlLogix standard digital I O modules e using features specific to ControlLogix standard digital input modules e using features specific to ControlLogix standard digital output modules Move to Chapter 4 ControlLogi
8. 7 18 Module Specific Information 1756 1H161 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF lms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name o GND 0 2 2114 INQ o o o DC 0 are connected together on the Isolated GND 1 14 Ja E IN 1 module For example DC can be wong GND 2 je 5 IN 2 connected to either terminal DC 3 o GND 3 s 7a IN 3 o o DC 3 marked GND 15 GND 4 ao 9 EDT IN 4 2 Do not physically connect more GND 5 1 EDT IN 5 than two wires to a single RTB GND 6 1D 1B IN 6 5 terminal W hen you use the DC 7 o GND 7 TE sig IN 7 ooo DC 7 second GND 15 terminal to daisy GND 8 I s 1 IN 8 chain to other RTBs always Jumper bar Cut to length GND 9 1G j20 19T IN 9 2 connect the daisy chain to the GND 10 l2 2 IN 10 o o terminal directly connected to the ilonisolated GND 11 9 23 IN 11 supply wire as shown pesos GND 12 E 25 IN 12 3 The jumper bar part number is 9 GND 13 E2 z N 13 o o 97739201 Contact your local GND 14 I
9. Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 output data Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module L _pc 0 2 1 4 OUT 0 Isolated ___RTNOUT 0 He 4 ie OUT 0 wiring DC 1 F7ay 6 5 OUT 1 RTN OUT 1 Je 7 OUT 1 L _p 2 Fey o sig OUT 2 L_ __RTNOUT 2 Jap 2 uy ouT 2 DC 3 14 Bg OUT 3 RTN OUT 3 1E 16 156 OUT 3 Non isolated wiring DC 4 E 8 VE OUT 4 RTN OUT 4 Tq 20 19g OUT 4 Daisy chain to DC 5 Hay 2 ag OUT 5 other RTBS 4 _______ RNOUTS AE 2 23 OUT 5 DC 6 HE 26 25 OUT 6 __ RTN OUT 6 1E 28 27 OUT 6 DC 7 E 30 29 OUT 7 RTN OUT 7 JG 32 31 OUT 7 Not used E 34 33 Not used Not used E 36 35g Not used Daisy chain to a other RTBs i Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart a Surge pc o 44 F LEk IF X Continuous ail si 60 C AE OUT 0 T dy 2 a iN E3 A aaa OUuT 0 Xip Display Output ans 0 10ms ControlBus Interface Device Time 30351 M 40849 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 40169 M LED indicator Ke G gt DC OUTPUT ST FUSE 3 012345670 01234567K ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 40467 M Mod
10. name are connected Group0 L1 0 OUT 1 together on the module For example L1 can be L1 0 OUT 2 connected to any terminal J umper gt marked L1 0 wire L1 0 OUT 3 N Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown This wiring example shows a single voltage source L1 1 If separate power sources a are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 HE cpm OUT 7 L1 1 w SeS L2 1 Ea D 40183 M Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator Diagnostic Control Block with 5 Opto amp Transformer Isolation L1 20A urge AC OUTPUT ControlBus VAC i 2 Interface ite A 3 Short GATE es o wt FUSEO 1234567 K _ Verify N AY OUT E o Load t D 6 L2 1A Display Loss of Field Power lt ELECTRONICALLY FUSED r y 41118 M Time 43MS 40852 M 20995 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 37 1756 OA8E Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common M odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis
11. Top guide BDI S KE BERR D h 2 Left side guides Bottom guide 20853 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 5 11 2 Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module until the latches snap into place Locking tab 20854 M 3 Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 5 12 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module Removing the Removable If you need to remove the module from the chassis you must first Terminal Block remove the RTB from the module ATTENTION Shock hazard exists If the RTB is removed from the module while the field side power is applied the module will be electrically live Do not touch the RTB s terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before removing the module 1 Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module 2 Open the RTB door using the bottom tab 3
12. 0 00 ee eeee 8 1 Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your Module 8 1 LED indicators for input modules 8 1 LED indicators for output modules 8 2 Using RSLogix 5000 to Troubleshoot Your Module 8 4 Determining Fault TV0G cs 4 0 kee hae ee hee 8 5 Chapter Summary and What s Next 00 8 6 Appendix A Module Tag Names and Definitions A 3 Standard Input Module Tags 00e005 A 3 Standard Output Module Tags 04 A 4 Diagnostic Input Module Tags 0 A 6 Diagnostic Output Module Tags A 8 Accessing the Tags 004 6 eae aoe howe Sobek kw es cee A 11 Changing Configuration Through the Tags A 12 Module wide Configurable Features A 12 Point by Point Configurable Features A 13 Downloading New Configuration Data From the Tag Honors 2 sora ts oot ye teach ed hoe ecee wae A 14 Sample Series of Tagseauh isaac he eee ea A 15 Appendix B Using Message Instructions 0 cece ee eee B 1 Processing Real Time Control and Module Services B 2 One Service Performed Per Instruction B 2 Creating a New Tag 23 4 saccas eae eee Ae 4 eee ees B 3 Enter Message Configuration 0000 B 4 Using Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs B 10 Resetting a Fuse Performing the Pulse Test and Resetting Latched Diagnostics B 13 Publicat
13. Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF lms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module L1 L2 Jumper wire Group 1 IN 13 Daisy chain lt L2 1 to other RTBs Simplified schematic 2 m JG U 2 w JL U IN 11 IN 15 2 W Sleleleleleleletele D 40180 M LED indicator AC INPUT 5V 3 VVV aa MV o 7 i YEK gt 3 GND gt ot Control Bus Display Interface 3 T012345670 ST 89WURBU K 30339 M 20941 M Module Specific Information 7 23 1756 IN 16 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 56W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 5 1W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 10 30V ac 47 63Hz Nominal Input Voltage 24V ac On State Current 5mA 10V ac 60Hz minimum 1 2mA 30V ac 60Hz max
14. L1 0 Loss of Field Power jut eee Net ele e l T pora ae S N 0 N 1 N 2 Group 0 l 62kQ 1 2W 5 resistor 62kQ 1 2W 5 resistor Group 1 T a ay D L1 1 Loss of Field Power 40202 LED indicator AC INPUT ST01234567 0 FT 01234567 K 3 DIAGNOSTIC 20927 M Module Specific Information 7 7 1756 IA8D Specifications umber of Inputs 8 4 points common odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V dc amp 3mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 58W aximum Power Dissipation M odule 45W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 15 35 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 79 132V ac 47 63Hz Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac On State Curren 7AV 5mA ac 47 63Hz minimum 16mA 132V ac 47 63Hz maximum aximum Off State Voltage 20V aximum Off State Current 2 5mA aximum Input mpedance 132V ac 8 25kQ 60Hz nput Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware Delay ON to OFF Hardware Delay Programmable filter Ims amp 2ms 10ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter 9ms amp 18ms 8ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Func
15. Using Ladder Logic B 13 Resetting a Fuse Performing the Pulse Test and Resetting Latched Diagnostics IMPORTANT Version 8 of the RSLogix CD contains a sample progaram for the Pulse Test The following ladder logic program shows how to reset the electronic fuse of a faulted point and perform a pulse test through ladder logic Type CF Geek bamia Conc Type OF Carew age Conic Hras Eome File Dei Ho I EME RR Daz Pies Aeta idii 20 000_ a a a a O_ on Tape OP Gara j 4 Hase Canin LaohetLrees i on n Click on the box in each rung to see the configuration and communication information pop up associated with it Examples of these pop ups can be found on the following pages The following screen shows examples of the tags used in the ladder logic as they appear in the tag editor Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 B 14 Using Ladder Logic Performing a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status This ladder logic example shows how to retrieve module identification and status through a WHO service In this application a message instruction retrieves the following module identification information e Product type e Product code e Major revision e Minor revision e Status e Vendor e Serial number e String length e Ascii string A full explanation of each module identification category above is provided after the ladder logic application IM PORTANT This example uses a us
16. L2 2 marked L1 15 L1 3 118 ja 7 OUT 3 N O j 2 Do not physically connect more DC 4 o L1 4 Tajo 9 DT JOUT 4 N O o DC 4 than two wires to a single RTB L1 5 E 12 JET JOUT 5 N O terminal When you use the L1 6 J 13 DT OUT 6 N O second L1 15 terminal to daisy L1 7 J 5 1 OUT 7 N O chain to other RTBs always a a 1 8 18 17 OUT 8 N O connect the daisy chain as shown l L1 9 E2 19 e OUT 9 N O 3 W hen using the jumper bar to L1 10 a 21 g OUT 10 N O A daisy chain terminals together as Non isolated L1 11 0 3 Q OUT 11 N O V Zag L1 12 126 25 OUT 12 N O shown the maximum current wiring f you may apply to the module L1 13 192 27 E jOUT 13 N 0 through a single contact point L1 14 10 OUT 14 N O i is 8A L1 15 0 3 OUT 15 N 0 34 33 4 The jumper bar part number is oe L1 15 1g H D ie e 97739201 Contact your local y used 1 OL eee Rockwell Automation sales L2 representative to order additional Daisy chain to other RTBs jumper bars if necessary E E 5 If separate power sources are Siia used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic LED indicator 24V RELAY OUTPUT Display gt L1 VVV 7 3 3 Control Bus I ST01234567 0 Interface f L OUT ST 89 wupeus K l 6 30337 M 40455 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 1756 OW 161 Specifications Module Specific Information 7 59 Specific
17. 1756 116 NOTES 1 N w E All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example DC COM can be connected to any terminal marked GND 1 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal W hen you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown This wiring example shows a single voltage source Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF lms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module ae HA HE O N IN 7 li are en o fi ID n 9 IEB I n 11 E D IN 13 E E Jumper gt n 15 EB N 14 Sel 0 If separate power sources me GND 1 Ii are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage DC COM 40179 M Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V 7 DC INPUT MWY VVV e S zs S IV ae 3 KI i Jrs ST012345670 f
18. lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D 3 M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 The commutating dv dt of the output vo tage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA OUTPUT TO L2 is 4V us maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range a resistor may be added across the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA I V R At 50mA and above the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for mthe output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at wr level installation manual Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industria ault Be sure the waveform is a good Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 34 1756 0A8D NOTES 1 If separate power sources M odule Specific Information Configurable features The following table l
19. 1756 0A 161 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module Isolated wiring L1 0 o 11 0 q 2 1 ouT 0 12 0 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same i L1 1 a 3 OUT 1 name are connected together L12 L1 2 as 5 OUT 2 O 12 2 on the module For example L1 b ted to eith L1 3 87 OUT 3 aS See L1 4 L1 4 10 o our 4 0 12 4 ermina marke 15 1 5 hoe uf OUT 5 2 Do not physically connect more L1 6 u a OUT 6 erred Whetu usile L17 Feds 2 EDL OUT 7 i Ale 17 4 k second L1 15 terminal to daisy mper bar Cut to length a c a chain to other RTBs always connect the daisy chain L1 10 1 2 21 T OuT 10 ae show Non isolated L1 11 q 74 23 OUT 11 V nes wiring L1 12 1 25 OUT 12 3 The jumper bar part number L1 13 M amp s 27 OUT 13 i m
20. 5 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage To Determine Leakage Resistor P S Field side power supply Ri eaxMaximum P S Voltage 19V ac 1 5mA Ri gaxMinimum P S Voltage 20V ac 2 5mA Recommended Values Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF 9ms Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4 11 Open Wire Detection Enabled 4 15 Field Power Loss Detection Enabled 4 16 Diagnostic Change of State for Enabled 4 25 Output Modules Communications Format Full diagnostics input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module Not used Daisy chain to other RTBs Group 0 L2 0 L2 0 L2 0 P S Voltage Rieax 1 2W 5 L2 m 100V ac 10 43kQ 110V ac 10 47kQ 115V act 10 47kQ 120V ac 10 51kQ L1 Simplified schematic 5V ei gt V Az Input AA igo a a Di io Hd m Disply GND 45V Control Bus Interface aes ia 7 A z Open wire 4 i e 4 to Display GND Control Bus Interface Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001
21. MOV Move Source Time_at_which_Input_ Changed 1 Dest LastTimestamp 1 76 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Using Ladder Logic B 11 Rung 3 is the main rung which checks for Change of State on the input point by comparing the current input timestamp i e Time at which Input Changed with the last timestamp i e LastTimestamp The input point i e point 0 must have Change of State enabled or the timestamp will not update when the point transitions e g OFF ON Once Change of State has been detected 10ms is ADDed to the input timestamp and sent to the output module s timestamp This will cause the output module to apply its output exactly 10ms i e 10 000us after the input changed state The MOVe instructions update LastTimestamp in preparation for the next change of state Etta Timestamps are 8 bytes in size two DINTs but only the lower 4 bytes of the output timestamp i e Time at which Output Will Change are used to schedule the outputs into the future to a max of 16 7s or 16 700 000us LastT imestamp 1 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 B 12 Using Ladder Logic Rung 4 is the standard XIC OTE rung which controls the output point based upon the input point The only difference is that the output module is configured for Scheduled Outputs The outputs will not get applied until the scheduled time has occurred Local 0 1 Data 0 Local 1 0 Data 0 4 End The follo
22. Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 14 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Field Wiring Options As with input modules ControlLogix output modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point group to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use IM PORTANT Although some ControlLogix I O modules provide non isolated field side wiring options each I O module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side Multiple Point Densities ControlLogix output modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Fusing Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature protects the module from electrical damage Other modules require external fusing Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or through ladder logic running on a controller For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse see page 6 22 Electronic fuses are also reset through a software IMPORTANT reset or when the output module is power cycled ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 15 The following modules use electronic fusing e 1756 OA8E
23. 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 20 Module Specific Information 1756 1M 161 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF lms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module Mea NOTES 1 All terminals with the same L2 0 o L2 0 2 1g IN 0 o o olL1 0 name are connected together Isolated L2 1 ho 3iq IN 1 on the module For example wiring 12 2 o 12 2 Tepe 5i IN 2 __ 9 o9 _oL1 2 L2 can be connected to any L2 3 Hege 714 IN 3 terminal marked L2 15 L2 4 o L2 4 id 1 9 IN 4 o o oL1 4 2 Do not physically connect L2 5 e no Is more than two wires to a L2 6 Te soL IN 6 single RTB terminal W hen aen L2 7 9 sg ve you use the second L2 15 Jiur per Bar cutta i oe Uan yk Re terminal to daisy chain to 79 1D 20 19 4 de other RTBs always connect L2 10 02 2D IN 10 ae
24. D Allen Bradley ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules Input M odules 1756 1A 16 I1A161 I1A8D 1B 16 1B 16D IB 161 1B 32 IC16 IH161 IM 161 IN 16 IV16 IV32 Output M odules 1756 0A16 OA16l 0A8 OA8D OA8E 0B 16D OB 16E 0B 161 0B32 0B 8 OB 8EI OC8 OH8I ON8 OV16E OW 161 OX8I User Manual Automation Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when
25. E 32 ak OUT 31 EN 34 33 DC 1 N 36 35 L 5 Surge Current Chart Continuous 60 C DC 0 5V ji fos OUT 0 l 8 A RTN a 2019 YO OUT 0 lt ControlBus Interface 0 5A lt Display 0 30347 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 i s Time 40851 M OUT 0 OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8 OUT 10 OUT 12 OUT 14 RTN OUT 0 OUT 16 OUT 18 OUT 20 OUT 22 OUT 24 OUT 26 OUT 28 OUT 30 RTN OUT 1 Group 0 40171 M LED indicator G gt DC OUTPUT sto1234567 ST 89 5ST 67 ST 45 111111 012 9 11 22 Ow NN e ON eN w ew wN a 1 8 2 6 NN OF OoN on 40465 M Module Specific Information 7 45 1756 OB 32 Specifications Number of Outputs 32 16 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 300mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane powerl 58W Maximum Power Dissipation 4 8W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 16 37 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 31 2V dc 50 C Linear derating 10 28V dc 60 C Output Current Rating Per Point 0 5A maximum 50 C Linear derating 0 354 maximum 60 C Per Module 16A maximum 50 C Linear derating 10A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 1A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 3mA per point Maximum
26. Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 A 16 Using Software Configuration Tags 1756 OA8D The set of tags associated with a 1756 OA8D module that was configured using Full Diagnostics Output Data for its Communications Format is shown below The configurable features for this configuration are as follows e Fault Mode and Value e Program Mode and Value e Diagnostic Latch e No Load e Output Verify e Field Power Loss When you access the tags for this module as described on page A 11 you see the screen below Fault mode and value Program mode and value Diagnostic latch enable No load enabled Output verify enable Field power loss enable SA ie _ O_O Oo SPD te i i te s seatoa_ooae ated_oa tnay 100 poan aroa ca in E er ee T E l I I I E i m m m m Gg Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Message Instructions Appendix B Using Ladder Logic You can use ladder logic to perform run time services on your module For example page 6 22 shows how to reset an electronic fuse on the 1756 OA8D module using RSLogix 5000 This appendix provides an example of how to reset the same fuse without using RSLogix 5000 In addition to performing run time services you can use ladder logic to change configuration Chapter 6 explained how to use the RSLogix 5000 software to set configuration parameters in your ControlLogix analog I O modu
27. 2 2 ControlNet Direct connections 2 6 Input modules in remote chassis 2 11 Network Update Time NUT P 3 Output modules in remote chassis 2 15 Rack connection P 3 2 7 Rack optimization P 3 2 7 Tip on conserving bandwidth 2 11 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Coordinated System Time CST P 2 CSA Certification 1 1 3 11 4 11 CST Timestamped Fuse Data Output Data Communications Format 6 7 CST Timestamped Fuse Data Scheduled Output Data Communications Format 6 8 CST Timestamped Input Data Communications Format D Data Exchange Producer consumer model 1 1 2 9 2 14 3 9 4 9 Data Transmissions Adjusting the RPI 6 18 Choosing an input module communications format 6 6 Choosing an output module communications format 6 7 COS 2 10 3 11 4 14 4 16 Diagnostic change of state 4 16 Diagnostic output modules 4 25 RPI P 3 2 10 3 11 4 14 4 16 4 25 Using COS on nondiagnostic input modules 6 12 Using timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs B 10 Default Configuration 6 10 Diagnostic Change of State 4 16 4 25 Diagnostic Latching 3 17 4 11 Diagnostic Timestamp 4 11 Direct Connection P 2 2 6 Disable Keying Electronic keying 3 6 4 6 Downloading Configuration Data From the tag editor A 14 Dynamic Reconfiguration 6 16 E Electronic Keying P 2 3 4 4 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 Compatible match P 2 3 5 45 Disable keying P 2 3 6 4 Exact match P 2 3 4 4 4 Usage tip 3 5 4 5 Electrostatic Discharge Prevent
28. 30 2D IN 14 Rockwell Automation sales GND 15 19 31g IN 15 representative to order additional DC o GND 15 I 0 Notused Lo DC jumper bars if necessary oe Not used 3 35 D Not used 4 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Daisy chain to other RTBs 40167 M Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V DC INPUT GND 0 as VE 8 C D KI so1234567 0H 4 ST 89WURBU4 K GND l 6 ControlBus Display Interface 30183 M 20945 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Module Specific Information 7 19 1756 IH161 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 Individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 125mA 5 1V dc amp 3mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 71W Max Power Dissipation M odule 5W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 17 05 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 90 146V dc Derated as follows 90 146V dc 50 C 12 Channels ON same time 90 132V dc 55 C 14 Channels ON same time 90 125V dc 60 C 16 Channels ON same time 90 146V dc 30 C 16 Channels ON same time Nominal Input Voltage 125V dc On State Current 1mA 90V dc minimum 3mA 146V dc maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 20V dc Maximum Off State Current 0 8mA Maximum Input Impedance 146V dc 48 67kQ Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmabl
29. Backplane Current 200mA 5 1V dc amp 250mA 24V dc Total backplane power 7 02W Max Power Dissipation M odule 5 5W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 18 76 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 74 132V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Point Per Group Per Module 2A max 60 C 4A max 30 C amp 2A max 60 C Linear derating 8A max 30 C amp 4A max 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 4V peak 2A Max Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Diagnostic Functions Short Trip gt 20A for 100ms minimum Field Power Loss Zero Cross Time stamp of Diagnostics Detects at 25V peak minimum Firmware phase locked loop lms Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to CST Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 25V peak Fusing Electronically fused per point Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max cont
30. C Surge Current per Point 2A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 3mA per output Maximum On State Voltage Drop 400mV dc 1A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON 1ms maximum ON to OFF lms maximum Diagnostic Functions Short Trip 1 8A 24V dc Output ON then short Time stamp of diagnostics 4 1A 24V dc for 18ms Output ON into short Ims Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Electronically fused per group Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 nonc
31. Creating a New Module 0 0 e ee eee 6 4 Communications Format lt 5 ot aarache sasaaa 6 6 Electronic KEVIN ssi caviaweuws bie id ieee 6 9 Using the Default Configuration 000 6 10 Altering the Default Configuration 6 10 Configuring a Standard Input Module 6 12 Configuring a Standard Output Module 6 13 Configuring a Diagnostic Input Module 6 14 Configuring a Diagnostic Output Module 6 15 Editing Configuration 5 7 daewoo ae Ne eee he a 6 16 Reconfiguring Module Parameters in Remote Run Mode 6 17 Reconfiguring Module Parameters in Program Mode 6 18 Configuring I O Modules in a Remote Chassis 6 19 Input Online Services Sanne Sed Sd wa hee SEES 6 21 Output Online Servieess since oobi eg eds Bw ow SS 6 22 Viewing and Changing Module Tags 6 23 Chapter Summary and What s Next 00 6 24 Chapter 7 What This Chapter Contains 0 00 ce eee 7 1 7 OA a iy cere wey ts ih cove ey E wle hte gee ease BES 7 2 T7GOAA TG iir a a chee eda le eyes 7 4 1750 TAB Di 32 ees he aeons eta et oe Dee eons aed 7 6 T7501 BI G44 464 0 8 eee ed 2 Soa kete Sue mea Ses 7 8 1750 IBTOD A aka he can dk ea meme et ee 7 10 PT BOLD VO jet tine ran en Ke ait a axe Cred a ate iach 7 12 PEL BS 2 eens sel cy sory hy dh sy fy ph oe el oy shy st Sent ach ob y s 7 14 AOE lOe a cece da one bad et eae G hal ee ete
32. FoG IB IB 3 This wiring example shows a single Group1 N 13 ig IEB IN 12 Group 1 voltage source 18 17 4 If separate power sources are IN 15 E E IN 14 used do not exceed the specified i f isolation voltage DC 1 ie ie DC 1 as 42552 Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V DC 0 DCINPUT Ce gt 3 a D RRR L x S ST01234567 0 t AM ST 89lURBU4I K Gio ControlBus Display re Interface Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 42674 Module Specific Information 7 25 1756 1V16 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 110mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 61W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 5 41W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 18 47 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 10 30V dc Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc On State Current 2 0mA 10V dc minimum 10mA 30V dc maximum M aximum Off State Voltage 5V M aximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 3 2kQ 30V de Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter Oms 1ms or 2ms 1ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter Oms 1m
33. Timestamp on inputs Software configurable 200us Short Inrush Current 250mA peak decaying to 37 in 22ms without activation Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100s minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage between groups 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade W idth for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked W Listed Industrial Control Equipment e Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 level installation manual M aximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this co
34. Using Features Specific to Standard Input Modules ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 11 CE CSA UL FM Agency Approvals Any ControlLogix digital I O modules that have obtained CE CSA UL FM agency approval are marked as such Ultimately all digital modules will have these agency approvals and be marked accordingly These features are common to all ControlLogix digital input modules Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time Your ControlLogix input module will send data in one of two ways e Requested Packet Interval a user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer e Change of State configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON The data will be sent at the RPI rate By default this setting is always enabled for input modules For a more detailed explanation of these features see page 2 10 Softw are Configurable Filter Times ON to OFF and OFF to ON filter times can be adjusted through RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix input modules These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules For an example of how to set filter times see pages 6 12 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P
35. e ST 89 WUBI K ControlBus Display Interface 30350 M 20945 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 17 1756 1C16 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V dc amp 3mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 58W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 5 2W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 17 73 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 30 55V dc 60 C all channels Linear derating 30 60V dc 55 C all channels Linear derating Nominal Input Voltage 48V dc On State Current 2mA 30V dc minimum 7mA 60V dc maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 10V Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 60V dc 8 57kQ Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter Oms 1ms or 2ms 1ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter Oms Ims 2ms 9ms or 18ms 4ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of state Software configurable Time stamp of inputs 200us Cyclic Update Time User selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max c
36. e 1756 OB16E e 1756 OB8EI e 1756 OV16E See Table 3 A to determine what fuse to use in your application Table 3 A Recommended Fuses Circuit Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse Supplier Type Fuse AC 1756 OA8 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SAN O Industry protect outputs 6 3A Corp SOC p n See publication 1492 2 12 Medium lag MT 4 6 3A 1756 OA8E2 3 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 OA162 4 5 Yes Fused on a per group basis 5x20mm Littlefuse p n 3 15A H2153 15 Slo Blow 1500A Interruption current 1756 OA1612 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs 6 3A MT 4 6 3A See publication 1492 2 12 Medium lag 1756 ON8 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs 6 3A MT 4 6 3A See publication 1492 2 12 Medium lag DC 1756 OB8 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs 4A M Q2 4A See publication 1492 2 12 Quick acting 1756 OB8El2 3 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 0B16E2 26 Yes Fused on a per group basis Electronically fused 1756 0B161 7 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs 4A M Q2 4A See publication 1492 2 12 Quick acting Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 16 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Table 3 A Recommended Fuses
37. publication 1492 2 12 Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm max RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm max Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors W ire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation max Category 23 Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked Oy Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W i
38. repeatable every 1s 60 C Minimum Load Current 2mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2V dc 2A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON lms maximum ON to OFF 2ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification when
39. the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input 8 bytes data including fusing see BlownFuse NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data Input data Data Off On status for the output point ECHOED back from the output 1 bit per point module This is used to verify proper communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 1 On Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and 1 bit per point I O data for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module will be faulted by the processor O no fault 1 fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPw rLoss or CommFault FieldPwrLoss Input Data Field Power Loss AC output diagnostic detects that field power has failed 1 bit per point or is disconnected from the module No Load will also be detected 0 no fault 1 fault Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Using Software Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor FuseBlown 1 bit per point Table A 9 Diagnostic Output M odule Input Data Tags Configuration Definition or 1 0 Data Input Data Fu
40. using a ladder logic program see page B 13 Electronic fuses are also reset through a software IMPORTANT reset or when the output module is power cycled Field Power Loss Detection This feature is used when field power to the module is lost or zero cross cannot be detected A point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted IM PORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A For an example of how to enable the Field Power Loss detection diagnostic see page 6 14 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 25 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules Using the Diagnostic Change of State feature a diagnostic output module sends new data to the owner controller when one of three events occurs e Requested Packet Interval user defined interval for scheduled updates during normal module operation e Receipt of Output Data an output module echoes data back to the owner controller e Diagnostic Change of State any change in the diagnostics for a particular output point Unlike diagnostic input modules this fea
41. 0 WHO_ vendor 2 SINT 47 1 AB INT Device s product type e g 7 Digital 1 0 WHO_Information 2 WHO_product_type 2 INT Device s catalog code which maps to its WHO_Information 4 WHO_catalog_code 2 catalog number INT Device s major revision WHO_Information 6 WHO_major_revision 1 SINT Device s minor revision WHO_Information 7 WHO_minor_revision 1 SINT Device s internal status WHO_Information 8 WHO_ status 2 Bit0 0 unowned 1 owned INT Bit2 0 unconfigured 1 configured Bits7 4 forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status For Digital 1 0 0 Self Test 1 Flash update in progress 2 Communications fault 3 Not owned 4 Unused 5 Internal fault module needs to be flash updated 6 Run Mode 7 Program Mode N A for input modules Bit8 0 no fault 1 Minor recoverable fault e g backplane error detected Bit9 0 no fault 1 Minor non recoverable fault Bitl0 0 no fault 1 Major recoverable fault Bitl1 0 no fault 1 Major non recoverable fault e g module needs to be reflashed Bits15 12 unused Device s serial number WHO_Information 10 WHO_serial_number 4 DINT Number of characters in the text string WHO_Information 14 WHO_string_length 1 SINT Device s ASCII text string describing the WHO_Information 15 WHO_ascii_ string 32 module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Ladder Logic B 9 Table 3 lists tags used in the Source and Destination fields of the M
42. 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 18 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers Bit 31 ControlLogix digital input modules multicast fault status data to any owner listening controllers All input modules maintain a Module Fault Word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions as shown on the next page The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred e Module Fault Word This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital input modules All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits bits 0 15 are used in the Module Fault Word Fault bits in the Field Power Loss Word and Open Wire Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things It can indicate e A communications fault In this case all 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density e A field power loss condition In this case only the bit s affected is set to 1 e An open wire condition In this case only the bit s affected is
43. 1 2 2 Bidirectional connections 2 6 2 8 Loss of Field Power 3 13 4 18 Loss of Field Power Detection Diagnostic output modules 4 24 M Major Revision P 3 3 4 4 4 6 3 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5 Considerations for timestamping 3 9 4 9 M arking Diagnostic Data Changes 4 11 Mechanical Keying 1 4 M essage Instructions In ladder logic B 1 Minor Revision P 3 3 4 4 4 6 3 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5 M odule Compatibility Diagnostic input modules 4 1 Diagnostic output modules 4 2 Nondiagnostic input modules 3 1 Nondiagnostic output modules 3 2 M odule Fault Word Diagnostic input modules 4 25 4 26 Diagnostic output modules 4 27 4 28 Standard input modules 3 18 Standard output modules 3 19 3 20 M odule Identification Information 1 5 B 14 ASCII text string 1 5 Catalog code 1 5 M ajor revision 1 5 Minor revision 1 5 Product type 1 5 Retrieving 3 3 4 3 Serial number 1 5 Status 1 5 Vendor ID 1 5 WHO service 1 5 Module Services In ladder logic B 2 Module Status Retrieving 1 5 B 14 Module Tags Accessing in RSLogix 5000 6 23 A 11 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Changing configuration A 12 Diagnostic input modules A 6 Diagnostic output modules A 8 Sample series input module A 15 Sample series output module A 16 Standard input modules A 3 Standard output modules A 4 Module Specific Information 1756 IA16 7 2 1756 IA161 7 4 1756 IA8D 7 6 1756 IB16 7 8 1756 IB16D 7 10 1756 IB16 7 12 1756 IB32 7 14 1756
44. 15 are used in the Module Fault Word Fault bits in the Field Power Loss Word and Open Wire Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things It can indicate e A communications fault In this case all 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density e A field power loss condition In this case only the bit s affected is set to 1 e An open wire condition In this case only the bit s affected is set to 1 The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital input modules Bit 0 Module Fault W ord All modules 1 1 A communications fault sets all bits in the M odule i Fault Word A Field Power Loss or Open W ire condition sets the appropriate bit in the M odule Fault W ord Group1 Group 0 Field Power Loss Word 1 1756 IA8D only A loss of field power sets the bit s for that group in the Field Power Loss Word and also sets the appropriate bit in the M odule Fault Word Open Wire Word Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 An open wire
45. 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 52 M odule Specific Information 1756 OH8I NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example the load can be connected to either terminal marked OUT 0 2 Do not physically connect more than two wires toa single RTB terminal When you daisy chain to other RTBs always connect the daisy chain as shown 3 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module DC 0 2 1 OUT 0 Isolated RTNOUT 0 Fay 3 OUT 0 wiring DC 1 g l6 5 QUT 1 E RTN OUT 1 8 7 OUT 1 LC 1 0e 2 10 9 OUT 2 L e RINOUT 2 JE 12 11 OUT 2 __ _ _ DC 3 14 13 OUT 3 RTN OUT 3 16 15 OUT 3 Non isolated wiring DC 4 Tey 18 17 OUT 4 RTN OUT 4 E 20 19 OUT 4 Da
46. 1V x 24V X3 3V 9 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 10 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 11 x5 1V x24V X3 3V 12 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 13 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 14 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 15 x5 1V x24V X3 3V 16 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V TOTALS mA W 1 mA W 2 mA W 3 This number This This number cannot exceed number cannot 10000mA for cannot exceed 1756 PA72 PB72 exceed 4000mA 13000mA for 2800mA 1756 PA75 PB75 These three wattage values 1 2 3 added together cannot exceed e 70W 40 C For 1756 PA72 PB72 Series A 55W 60 C For 1756 PA72 PB72 Series A e 75W 40 60 C For 1756 PA72 PB72 Series B and 1756 PA75 PB75 Series A We recommend that you copy this worksheet for use in checking the power supply of each ControlLogix chassis used Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 C 2 Power Supply Sizing Chart Notes Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Appendix D Driving M otor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Use this appendix to choose a ControlLogix digital I O module to drive Bulletin 500 Series motor starters in your application The tables below list the number of motor starters 5 sizes are listed for each module that a particular digital I O module can drive IMPORTANT When using the tables remember that the supply voltage for each module must not drop below the minimum state motor starter supply voltage Table D 1 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Mo
47. 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON 2ms maximum ON to OFF 2ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade W idth for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification when product is marked Up Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certif
48. 2E pj Decimal BOOL Hl Local 2 C FaultMode 2 0000_0000_0000_00 Binary DINT 2 Type a new val eae bl PEANN NAS Local 2 C Fault alue _2 0000_0000_0000_00 Binary DINT Local2 C ProgMode 2 0000_0000_0000_00 Binary DINT Local 2 C Progv alue 2 0000_0000_0000_00 Binary DINT Local 2 1 ERA AB 1756_ Local 2 0 Gena AB 1756_ w Monitor Tags E Tas 4 LA RSLogix 5000 will not allow you to enter invalid values for any feature If you enter an invalid value the software prompts you to reenter the value You cannot proceed until a valid value is entered Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Software Configuration Tags A 13 Point by Point Configurable Features For features such as No Load enable that are configured on a point by point basis there are two ways to change the configuration e Pull down Menu or e Highlight Value Pull down M enu User User_doc controller User_doc controller Z Show All ha TagName E JTagName Tag Name Ve Style 1 Decimal 1 Decimal ERT oo00_0000_00 ew 2 0000_0000_0000_00 0000_0000_00 2 0000_0000_0000_00 a o o oo 2 0000_0000_0000_00 Z 2 0000_0000_0000_ ahh afaa aa a of of of of of of o LP o of of o of of o 1 Click on the far left side of the Value column and a pull down menu appears E E re E E 2 Z E 1 Monitor Tags IKII 2 Highlight th
49. 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Min Load Current 10mA per point Max On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak 2A amp 6V peak load current lt 50mA Max Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA 0 2V ps for loads lt 50mA Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outpu See publication 1492 2 12 wn Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size
50. 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked Uy Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 12 Module Specific Information 1756 1B 161 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF
51. A bi colored LED indicates module status with an OK red green LED indicators are Table 8 A Status Indicators for Input Modules LED This display Means Take this action indicators OK Green light The inputs are being None multicast and in normal operating state OK Flashing green light The module has passed None internal diagnostics but is not multicasting inputs or it is inhibited OK Flashing red light Previously established Check controller and communication has timed chassis communication out OK Red light The module must be Replace the module replaced I O State Yellow The input is active None 0 Fault Red A fault has occurred forthis Check this point at the point controller Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 8 2 Troubleshooting Your M odule 1756 1B16D DC INPUT ST 01234567 FT 01234567 0 ST 89 WULRBUB K FLT 89 WNLRBUMB DIAGNOSTIC The following LED indicators are used with input modules 1 0 State J 1 0 Fault 1756 1A8D 1756 1B 161 IH161 IB16 IC16 IV16 AC INPUT DC INPUT le ST 01234567 0 EFT 01234567 K DIAGNOSTIC Module 6 ST 012345670 Status ST 89 ULB K 1756 1B32 1756 IV32 1756 1A16 IA16l IM161 IN16
52. C D Approved Class I Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 58 Module Specific Information 1756 OW 16l Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name j are connected together on the Isolated 1 9 o L1 0 h2 a OUT 0 N O O 12 0 module For example L1 can be wiring L1 1 T 3 QT OUT 1 N O i connected to either terminal LI 2 o L1 2 js 5 OUT 2 N 0
53. Choose a state for the outputs if communications fail in Program M ode IM PORTANT Outputs always go to Fault mode if communications fail in Run mode Click here to accept the parameters you have configured for your module This screen appears last in the wizard series of screens It is used during online monitoring but not initial configuration Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 12 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules Configuring a Standard The following ControlLogix digital input modules are standard Input Module input modules e 1756 IA16 e 1756 1161 e 1756 IB16 e 1756 IB16I e 1756 1B32 e 1756 IC16 e 1756 IH16I e 1756 IM16I e 1756 IN16 e 1756 IV16 e 1756 IV32 The configurable features for a standard input module are e Change of State e Input Filter Times Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4 Use the following page to configure your standard input module Mehals Properties Locat F i 755416 21 Click on the box to enable the mjera Zl Change filter change of state for a point L times here Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Configuring a Standard Output Module Change the Program M ode value here Change the Fault M ode value here Enable Field Power Loss here Choose the state of outputs after a Communications Failure here Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 13 The following ControlLogix digit
54. Circuit Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse Supplier Type Fuse DC 1756 08326 7 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm Littelfuse p n protect outputs 800mA P001 1003 or See publication 1492 2 12 Schurter p n 216 800 1756 0C8 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs 4A M Q2 4A See publication 1492 2 12 Quick acting 1756 OH8I 7 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs 4A M Q2 4A See publication 1492 2 12 Quick acting 1756 OV16E2 3 6 Yes Fused on a per group basis Electronically fused Relay 1756 OW 161 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs 6 3A MT 4 6 3A See publication 1492 2 12 Medium lag 1756 0X817 None Fused IFM is recommended to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs 6 3A MT 4 6 3A See publication 1492 2 12 Medium lag 1 For voltages above 132V ac the Interface Modules IFM are not an acceptable means to provide external fusing A rated terminal block for the intended application must be used 2 Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other code required wiring protection devices 3 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within m
55. E Loss here Set the Fault M ode value here F F F a eer F a i F Enable Output Verify here cer F F F Enable No Load here hc p 3 te P Enable Di ti a z E z nable Diagnostic Latching here peri FP Leave igap in Faga ioe aiie Choose the state of outputs after Prasan bicia 7 Change aipa io Pull Mocks ahs a communications failure here cmon cme noes Femi oe Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 16 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules Editing Configuration After you have set configuration for a module you can review and change your choices You can change configuration data and download it to the controller while online This is called dynamic reconfiguration Your freedom to change some configurable features though depends on whether the controller is in Remote Run Mode or Program Mode IM PORTANT Although you can change configuration while online you must go offline to add or delete modules from the project The editing process begins on the main page of RSLogix 5000 lang hedided Pinger l Terk j Dala Topaz Ue Deed Ee Fai s H Gg Modir JSA 1 ede ier ii 17 SE EME T E EHI p USE ED HEG 1751 1 Select the module 2 Click on the right mouse button to display the menu 3 Select Properties Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 17 Click on the tab of the page you
56. General and Connection tabs appear when you view a module s properties in i gt RSLogix 5000 Input M odule Formats The following are possible Communications Format choices for input modules e input data module returns only general fault and input data e CST timestamped input data module returns input data with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the input data changed e Full diagnostic input data module returns input data the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the input data changed and diagnostic data diagnostic modules only e Rack optimization the 1756 CNB module collects all digital input words in the remote chassis and sends them to the controller as a single rack image This connection type limits the status and diagnostic information available These additional Communications Format choices are used by controllers that want to listen to an input module but not own it The choices have the same definition as those above e Listen only input data e Listen only CST timestamped input data e Listen only full diagnostic input data e Listen only rack optimization Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 7 For example the screen below shows the choices available when you are configuring a 1756 IA16I module in a local chassis IM PORTANT Once the module is created the communications format cannot b
57. Hold the spot marked PULL HERE and pull the RTB off the module IMPORTANT Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Do not wrap your fingers around the entire door A shock hazard exists 20855 M Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 5 13 Removing the Module 1 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs from the Chassis Locking tabs Bi a EA 2 Pull module out of the chassis O_O y Se WEEN BEN EV pam soe N eee seh N Se SOE EN 3 SSS m 8 WS B30 E30 an Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 5 14 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 M odule Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about What s Next e installing the module e keying the removable terminal block and the interface module e connecting wiring e assembling the removable terminal block and the housing e installing the removable terminal block or interface module onto the module e removing the removable terminal block from the module e removing the module from the chassis Move on to Chapter 6 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Chapter 6 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules What This Cha pter Contains This chapter describes why you must configure your ControlLogix digital I O modules and how to configure the
58. IC16 7 16 1756 IH161 7 18 1756 IM 16 7 20 1756 IN16 7 22 1756 IV16 7 24 1756 IV32 7 26 1756 0A16 7 28 1756 0A16 7 30 1756 OA8 7 32 1756 OA8D 7 34 1756 OA8E 7 36 1756 OB16D 7 38 1756 OB16E 7 40 1756 OB16 7 42 1756 0B32 7 44 1756 OB8 7 46 1756 OB8El 7 48 1756 0C8 7 50 1756 OH8I 7 52 1756 ON8 7 54 1756 OV16E 7 56 1756 OW 16 7 58 1756 OX8 7 60 Multiple Ow ners Of input modules 2 18 N NEMA Clamp RTB 5 4 Netw ork Update Time NUT P 3 No Load Detection Diagnostic output modules 4 21 No Load Word Diagnostic output modules 4 27 4 28 0 Online Services Input modules 6 21 Output modules 6 22 Open Wire Detection 4 15 Open Wire Word Diagnostic input modules 4 25 4 26 Output Data Echo 2 14 2 17 3 13 4 18 Output Fault State Configuable in RSLogix 5000 3 12 Output Fault States Configuring in RSLogix 5000 4 17 Output Online Services 6 22 Output Verification Diagnostic output modules 4 22 Output Verify Word Diagnostic output modules 4 27 4 28 Owner Controller Logix5550 Controller P 1 2 2 Ownership 2 2 Direct connections 2 6 Listen only 2 17 Listen only rack optimization 2 7 Multiple owners P 3 Multiple owners of input modules 2 18 Owner controller P 3 Owner controller I O module relationship 2 2 Rack connection P 3 2 7 Rack optimization 2 7 2 8 Remote connections P 3 2 11 2 15 p Point Level Fault Reporting Diagnostic modules 4 12 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge 1 6 Producer Consume
59. INT 6 performing the pulse test Optimum time to perform pulse test is at its peak AC voltage Units are in 100us increments Default tag value 4ms i e 40 Specifies how long to wait after the pulse Output_Verify Delay Pulse_Test_Parameters 2 is completed before declaring a fault INT 8 Output verify delay parameter is needed to account for the hardware propagation delay Units are in 100s increments Default tag value 2ms i e 20 CST_Information Current CST Time from Module CST_Information 0 Current_Time 8 SINT 20 DINT 2 Status of CST in Module CST_Information 8 CST_ Status 2 BitO O timer OK 1 timer fault INT Bitl 0 n0 ramping 1 ramping ramping indicates that once time is synchronized it will correct errors by slowly ramping to the master s time Bit2 O not time master 1 time master e g controller Bit3 0 time not synced 1 time synced with master Size of timer in bits CST_Information 10 CST_Timer_Size 2 INT Unused CST_Information 12 CST_reserved 8 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 B 8 Using Ladder Logic Table B 2 Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Source Destination Description Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data Tag in MSG to from generic source destination buffers eee on Source Destination Length bytes WHO _ Information Device manufacturer s vendor ID e g WHO_ Information
60. Keying Tab M odule side of RTB 67 20851 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 5 4 Installing the ControlLogix I O M odule Connecting W iring You can use an RTB or IFM to connect wiring to you module If you are using an RTB follow the directions below to connect wires to the RTB An IFM has been prewired before you received it If you are using an IFM to connect wiring to the module skip this section and move to page 5 10 Three Types of RTBs each RTB comes with housing e Cage Clamp Catalog number 1756 TBCH e NEMA Clamp Catalog number 1756 TBNH e Spring Clamp Catalog number 1756 TBSH or TBS6H Cage Clamp 1 Insert the wire into the terminal 2 Turn the screw clockwise to close the terminal on the wire ttt Strain relief area 0O O 20859 M NEMA Clamp Terminate wires at the screw terminals KA SD SD DID Ole DiD SS Sia D Hep 2X lt Strain relief area 40201 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 5 5 Spring Clamp 1 Insert the screwdriver into the outer hole of the RTB 2 Insert the wire into the open terminal and remove the screw driver Strain relief ar
61. O Module Features 4 23 The Pulse Test can be used to perform a preemptive diagnosis of possible future module conditions For example you can use Pulse Test to e detect a blown fuse before it happens The Blown Fuse diagnostic see page 4 20 for a complete explanation of fusing can only be used when an output module is in the ON state But it would useful to be made aware when operating conditions for a module may cause a blown fuse If you perform a pulse test on the module while the output is in the OFF state the output point is commanded to be ON briefly as described above Although no diagnostic bits are set in the output data echo the pulse test will report a failure because conditions when the point is ON indicate a blown fuse condition may occur see pages 4 12 amp 4 13 The Pulse Test does not guarantee a fuse will blow IMPORTANT j BEA when the output point turns on It merely indicates this condition is possible e detect a No Load condition with an output ON The No Load diagnostic see page 4 21 for a complete explanation can only detect a fault i e set the No Load bit when an output point is in the OFF state But you may find it useful to be made aware when operating conditions for that point may reveal a potential No Load condition If you perform a pulse test on an output point while it is in the ON state the output point is commanded to be OFF briefly as described on page 4 22 The pulse test will rep
62. Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module Group 0 Daisy chain to other RTBs J umper me Group 1 OUT 1 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7 DC 0 OUT 9 OUT 11 OUT 13 OUT 15 DC 1 Electronic Fuse Circuitry ControlBus Interface Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 OUT 0 3 OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 8 OUT 10 OUT 12 4 4 Slelelelelelelelele OUT 14 41113 M CY DC COM Surge Current Chart DC O S 7A urge Continuous ere 60 C loto 74 oO n RTN 0 10ms OUT 0 Time 40851 M RTN OUT 0 RTN OUT 1 40174 M LED indicator gt DC OUTPUT 3 T01234567 FUSE E ST 89DULRBUB K FUSE E ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 40464 M Module Specific Information 7 41 1756 0B 16E Specifications Number of Outputs 16 8 points common M odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 250mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 1 32W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 4 1W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 13 98 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 31 2V dc Output Current Rating Per Point 1A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60
63. Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 A 8 Using Software Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor FaultLatchEn 1 bit per point Diagnostic Output M odule Tags Tables A 8 to A 10 list and define all tags that may be used for ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Output modules have three types of tags e configuration e input data e output data IM PORTANT The table below lists all possible diagnostic output module tags In each application though the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Configuration Tags Table A 8 Diagnostic Output M odule Configuration Tags Configuration Definition or 1 0 Data Configuration Fault is Latched If enabled for a point any NoLoad OutputVerifyFault or FieldPwrLoss will stay latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer exists until the User clears the fault This does not affect FuseBlown it is always latched O disable 1 enable latching FaultM ode Configuration Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of 1 bit per point outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue OFF or ON 1 Hold Last State FaultValue Configuration Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultM ode to configure the state of 1 bit per point outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultM ode O OFF 1 ON FieldPwrLossEn Configuration Field
64. Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 1 Choose your motor starter Allen Bradley Bulletin 500 Size 3 120V ac 60Hz 2 3 Poles Inrush 1225VA Sealed 45VA 12 size 3 motor starters 2 Determine the number of Motor starters required for your application Driving M otor Starters with ControlLogix Digital I O Modules D 3 3 Choose a ControlLogix digital output module 1756 OA16I A Output voltage 74 265V ac Output steady state current per point 2A maximum 30 C amp 1A maximum 60 C Linear derating Output steady state current per module 5A maximum 30 C amp 4A maximum 60 C Linear derating Output surge current per point 20A maximum for 43mS repeatable every 25 60 C 4 Determine the maximum environmental operating temperature 50 C 5 Confirm the voltage Range is within the Motor starter range Motor Starter uses 120V ac 1756 OA16I A operates in a 74 120V ac voltage range 6 Confirm the inrush current per point Inrush of motor starter Line voltage Inrush current 1225VA 120V ac 10 2Amps Inrush The 1756 OA16I allows 20A Inrush current from above specification at 60 C 7 Confirm the steady state point current of the module can drive the motor starter Sealed Line voltage Steady state current 45VA 120V ac 0 375A 50 C Output point current can drive 2A 033ma X 10 C 2A 0 33A 1 67A 50 C Above 30 C output point derates to 033mA C point derat
65. Status Information 1 5 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge 005 1 6 Removal and Insertion Under Power 1 6 Chapter Summary and What s Next 05 1 6 Chapter 2 What This Chapter Contains 000 ccc eeee 2 1 OWES Ds ed oe eek ek awe Pe Re REA EGR ERS 2 2 Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 2 2 I O Modules in Local Chassis 000005 2 2 I O Modules in Remote Chassis 05 2 3 Internal Module Operations 000 eee eee 2 4 Input MOUUIES 52 5 5552 c8 o ati gone eae does wae nea 2 4 OUP Ul MOGs cosa sane se nee eagle ae RS 2 5 COnneCHONS doc eh eke AoE ied dae ne EE EE ek oe 2 6 Direct Connections i echoes huh sw doe boa Meare bisa 2 6 Rack Connections 6 j bccadnd odaotwe Beets ied 2 7 Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage 2 8 Input Module Operation a564 cesaG tie ie e eid 2 9 Input Modules in a Local Chassis 0005 2 10 Requested Packet Interval RPI 2 10 Change of State COS e s 5 4 hak eee ES 2 10 Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 045 2 11 Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario 0 2 12 Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario 2 13 Output Module Operation sce es evew ewer evens 2 14 Output Modules in a Local Chassis 2 14 Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 2 15 Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario 04
66. Summary and In this chapter you learned about What s Next e determining input module compatibility e determining output module compatibility e using features common to ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules e using features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules e using features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Move to Chapter 5 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 30 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Notes Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Chapter 5 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes how to install ControlLogix modules The following table describes what this chapter contains and its location For information about See page Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 5 1 Keying the Removable Terminal Block 5 2 Connecting Wiring 5 4 Assembling The Removable Terminal Block and the Housing 5 7 Installing the Removable Terminal Block 5 10 Removing the Removable Terminal Block 5 12 Removing the Module from the Chassis 5 13 Chapter Summary and What s Next 5 14 Installing the ControlLogix You can install or remove the module while chassis power is applied ATTENTION The module is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove
67. a bottom Connector pins gt e a guides lt Slots for H ControlBus keyingthe D Connector RT D Ol qd Ol o O l 40200 M ControlBus connector The backplane connector interface for the ControlLogix system connects the module to the ControlBus backplane Connectors pins Input output power and grounding connections are made to the module through these pins with the use of an RTB or IFM Locking tab The locking tab anchors the RTB or IFM cable on the module maintaining wiring connections Slots for keying Mechanically keys the RTB to prevent inadvertently making the wrong wire connections to your module Status indicators Indicators display the status of communication module health and input output devices Use these indicators to help in troubleshooting Top and bottom guides Guides provide assistance in seating the RTB or IFM cable onto the module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Using Module Identification and Status Information What Are ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 1 5 Each ControlLogix I O module maintains specific identification information that separates it from all other modules This information assists you in tracking all the components of your system For example you can track module identification information to be aware of exactly what modules are located in any ControlLogix rack at any
68. a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch service For an example of how to enable or reset diagnostic latches see page 6 14 for diagnostic input modules and page 6 15 for diagnostic output modules TEA Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or when the I O module s power is cycled Diagnostic Timestamp Diagnostic I O modules can timestamp the time when a fault occurs or when it clears This feature provides greater accuracy and flexibility in running applications Modules use the ControlLogix system clock from a local controller to generate timestamps To use diagnostic timestamps you must choose the appropriate Communications Format during initial configuration For more information on choosing a Communications Format see Chapter 6 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 12 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features 8 Point AC 16 Point DC Diagnostic ControlLogix digital I O modules provide various grouping of points on different modules The 8 point AC modules and 16 point DC modules provide additional flexibility when designing module applications Point Level Fault Reporting Diagnostic I O modules set bits to indicate when a fault has occurred on a point by point basis The following fault conditions generate their own uniqu
69. ac 47 63Hz 45 C All Channels ON 159 242V ac 47 63Hz 60 C All Channels ON Nominal Input Voltage 240V ac On State Current 5mA 159V ac 60Hz minimum 13mA 265V ac 60Hz maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 40V ac Maximum Off State Current 2 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 265V ac 20 38kQ 60Hz Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter 1ms or 2ms 10ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter 9ms or 18ms 8ms maximum and filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of state Time stamp of inputs Software configurable 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac max continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 23 Screwdriver Blade Width
70. applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or part without written permission of Rockwell Automation is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices oro circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attention statements help you to e identify a hazard e avoid a hazard e recognize the consequences IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Allen Bradley is a trademark of Rockwell Automation European Communities EC Tf this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within Directive Compliance e European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives EMC Directive This product is tested to meet the Council Directive 89 336 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC by applying the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file e EN 50081 2 EMC Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment e EN 50082 2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive
71. be unlatched in the time between sampling and producing the real time input data One Service Performed Per Instruction Message instructions will only cause a module service to be performed once per execution For example if a message instruction sends a service to the module to unlatch the high high alarm on a particular channel that channel s high high alarm will unlatch but may be set on a subsequent channel sample The message instruction must then be reexecuted to unlatch the alarm a second time Using Ladder Logic B 3 Creating a New Tag Pa ladder logic is written in the Main Routine section of RSLogix Cede diik re ba J Dris Ta Corinto Faai Hrein karehe Tak Ta Ham m bainua h Ferm ten Double click here to enter the M ain Routine Message y N Message Control CANA Copy Instruction Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Vv Delete Instruction Del f j Add Ladder Element Ins After adding a message Edit Instruction Ene instruction to a rung you Edit Tag Description must create a tag for the sau ae message instruction Find Ctrl F Replace 1 Right click on the question mark to see this pull down menu Create Tag 2 Click here to Create a Tag GoTo Ctl G TT MainRoutine Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 B 4 Using Ladder Logic Name the tag here Enter an optional description here E Cancel Hep Tagtype g
72. circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached All other channels will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU Bridge etc 3 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protections is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V dc The output channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU Bridge etc W hat this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs Current flow with output ON ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 21 No Load Detection For each output point No Load detects the absence of field wiring or a missing load from each output point in the off state only The output circuit
73. condition on any point sets the bit for that point in the Open Wire Word and also sets the appropriate bit in the M odule Fault Word 41456 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controller ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 27 ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules multicast fault status data to any owner listening controllers All output modules maintain a Module Fault Word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions as shown on the next page The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred e Module Fault Word This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital output modules e Fuse Blown Word This word indicates a point group fuse blown on the module It s tag name is FuseBlown For more information on fusing see page 4 20 e Field Power Loss Word This word indicates a loss of field power to a point on the module It s tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is only available on 1756 OA8D module For more information on field power loss see page 4 16 e No Load Word This word indicates a loss of a load from a point on the module It s tag name is NoLoad For more information on no load conditions see page 4 21 e Output Verify Word This word indicates when an output is not performing as commanded
74. continuous current needed to operate the device The ControlLogix outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix inputs The exceptions are the ac and dc diagnostic input modules When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information specifically on the compatibility of motor starters to ControlLogix output modules see Appendix D For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company products to ControlLogix output modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG 2 1 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Modules ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 3 The following features are common to all ControlLogix standard digital I O modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP All ControlLogix I O modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature allows greater availability of the overall control system because while the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process Module Fault Reporting ControlLogix digital I O modules provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module s LED fault indicator and RSLogix 5000 will graphically display this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature allows you to determine how your module has been affec
75. data CST timestamped fuse data scheduled output data Listen only CST timestamped fuse data output data 1756 OA16I OA8 OB16l OB32 OB8 OC8 OH8I ON8 OW16I OX8I Output data Scheduled output data Rack optimization Listen only output data Listen only rack optimization 1756 OA8D OB16D Electronic Keying Full diagnostics output data Full diagnostics scheduled output data Listen only full diagnostics output data When you write configuration for a module you can choose how specific the keying must be when a module is inserted into a slot in the chassis For example the screen below shows the choices available when you are configuring a 1756 OA8 module i i e CST ein For a detailed explanation about electronic keying options see page 4 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 10 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules Using the Default If you use the default configuration and click on Finish you are done Configuration Altering the Default If you want to alter or view the default configuration click on Next 1 You will be taken through a series of wizard screens that enable you Configuration to alter or view the module Although each screen maintains importance during online monitoring two of the screens that appear during this initial module configuration process are blank They are shown here to maintain the graphical integrity of RSLogi
76. data to another processor Fora more detailed explanation of this process see Chapter 2 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 10 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 LED Status Information Each ControlLogix digital I O module has an LED indicator on the front of the module that allows you to check the module health and operational status of a module The LED displays vary for each module The following status can be checked with the LED indicators e I O status This yellow display indicates the ON OFF state of the field device I O status indicator does not illuminate without field power applied e Module status This green display indicates the module s communication status e Fault status This display is only found on some modules and indicates the presence or absence of various faults e Fuse status This display is only found on electronically fused modules and indicates the state of the module s fuse For examples of LED indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules see Chapter 7 Full Class Division 2 Compliance All ControlLogix digital I O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2 system certification This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed in an environment other than only a 100 hazard free Modules should not be pulled under power nor PORTANT should a powered RIB be removed in a Class I Division 2 environment
77. eae the daisy chain as shown i L2 11 24 231 IN 11 3 The jumper bar part number E hi ree HDs 25 6 ee sks is 97739201 Contact your g 2 14 E iz H N 14 local Rockwell Automation DE gt i L2 15 32 31 IN 15 Oo O e sales representative to order L2 z e at o 12 15 A 34 33 Not used additional jumper bars ai Notused Es 35 Not used if necessary a O 4 If separate power sources are i z used do not exceed the ERES specified isolation voltage Daisy chain to other RTBs 40168 M Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V Lag ACINPUT C e Oy ttf L2 0 Y AEk pa i l ie Ceo ST012345670 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 L GND 1 ho Control Bus Display Interface ST 89 0URBUB K 3 d 6 30338 M 20941 M Module Specific Information 7 21 1756 IM 161 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 Individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V dc amp 3mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 58W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 5 8W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 19 78 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 159 265V ac 47 63Hz 30 C All Channels ON 159 265V ac 47 63Hz 40 C 8 Points ON 159 253V
78. exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic eo Surge Current Chart gt Surge 5V 4A 9 oe OUT 0 s Ss T 2 Continuous IN RTN 60 C WAS OUT 0 E 7 gt lt ControlBus Interface Display 30347 M Time alas 40849 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 40466 M Module Specific Information 7 51 1756 0C8 Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 165mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 89W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 4 9W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 16 71 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 30 60V dc Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 1s 60 C Minimum Load Current 2mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2V dc 2A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON lms maximum ON to OFF 2ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Reverse Polarity Protect
79. for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked Uy j Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D Marked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 22 Module Specific Information 1756 IN 16 NOTES 1 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 N w gt All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example L2 can be connected to any terminal marked L2 0 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal W hen you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown This wiring example shows a single voltage source If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description
80. from controller EXAMPLE ASIC delay Hardware delay O O Z Typically 10uS Varies between modules and Signal sent from application RTB output point configuration 42702 As previously stated many factors e g module type voltage temperature if the module is turning ON or OFF affect the signal propogation delay on a module But a typical delay time can be estimated For example if you are tuming ON a 1756 OB16E module the signal propogation delay is affected by e hardware delay to energize the module typically 200uS on this module e ASIC scan 10S In the best case scenario the 1756 OB16E module has a 210uS signal propogation delay at 24V dc in 24 C These times are not guaranteed We list maximum delay times for each module in the specificatons Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 6 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System Connections Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 A connection is the data transfer link between a controller and the device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references in this case the I O module There are two types of connections e Direct Connections e Rack Connections The following sections describe each type of connection See Table 2 A on page 2 9 for differences between connection types The table also lists the advantages and disadvantages of each type Direct Connections A direct connection is a real time da
81. has a general faults and data single RPI value In traditional I O systems controllers poll input modules to obtain their input status Digital input modules in the ControlLogix system are not polled by a controller Instead the modules multicast their data either upon Change of State or periodically The frequency depends on the options chosen during configuration and where in the control system that input module physically resides IM PORTANT This is called the Producer Consumer model The input module is the producer of input data and the controller is the consumer of the data An input module s behavior varies depending upon whether it operates in the local chassis or in a remote chassis The following sections detail the differences in data transfers between these set ups Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 10 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System Input Modules in a Local Chassis Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 When a module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller the following two configuration parameters will affect how and when an input module multicasts data e Requested Packet Interval RPI e Change of State COS Requested Packet Interval RP This interval specifies the rate at which a module multicasts its data The time ranges from 200 microseconds to 750 milliseconds and is sent to the module with all other configuration parameters When the specifi
82. on a diagnostic output module has a Current Sense optoisolator used in parallel with the output transistor Current flows through this sensing circuit only when the output is OFF as shown in the simplified diagram below V Output Transistor Current flow with output OFF ee 41681 Diagnostic output modules list a minimum load current specification 1756 OA8D 10mA amp 1756 OB16D 3mA In the ON state the module must be connected to a load which will draw a minimum current equal to these values If a connected load is sized in accordance with the minimum load current specification diagnostic output modules are capable of sensing current through the optoisolator and the load when the output point is OFF For an example of how to set the No Load detection diagnostic see page 6 15 This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 22 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Field Side Output Verification Field Side Output Verification informs the user that logic side instructions that the module consumes are accurately represented on the power side of a switching device In other words for each output point this feature confirms that the output is ON when it is commanded to be ON The diagno
83. or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature 1 0 Module 1 Align circuit board with top and bottom chassis guides Printed Circuit Board 20861 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 5 2 Installing the ControlLogix I O M odule 2 Slide module into chassis until module tabs click 20862 M Keying the Removable Key the RTB to prevent inadvertently connecting the incorrect RTB to Terminal Block yom more When the RTB mounts onto the module keying positions will match up For example if you place a U shaped keying band in position 4 on the module you cannot place a wedge shaped tab in on the RTB or your RTB will not mount on the module We recommend that you use a unique keying pattern for each slot in the chassis Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 3 1 Insert the U shaped band with the longer side near the terminals Push the band onto the module until it snaps into U shaped Keying Band r 20850 M 2 Key the RTB in positions that correspond to unkeyed module positions Insert the wedge shaped tab on the RTB with the rounded edge first Push the tab onto the RTB until it stops TE When keying your RTB and module you must begin with a wedge shaped tab in position 6 or 7 W edge shaped gt N
84. parameters listed above must match or the inserted module will reject a connection to the controller ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 5 Compatible M atch The Compatible Match mode allows an I O module to determine whether it can emulate the module defined in the configuration sent from the controller With ControlLogix digital I O modules the module can emulate older revisions The module will accept the configuration if the configuration s major minor revision is less than or equal to the physical module s revision For example if the configuration contains a majorminor revision of 2 7 the module inserted into the slot must have minor revision of 2 7 or higher for a connection to be made TIP We recommend using Compatible Match whenever possible Remember though the module will only p work to the level of the configuration For example if a slot is configured of a module with major minor revision of 2 7 and you insert a module with a major minor revision of 3 1 the module works at the 2 7 level despite having been previously upgraded If possible we suggest you make sure configuration is updated to match the revision levels of all I O modules Failure to do so may not prevent the application from working but may defeat the purpose of upgrading your modules revision levels Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 6 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Publication 17
85. product or packaging is marked Oy Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class I Division 2 Group A B C D 3 M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 48 M odule Specific Information 1756 OB 8El NOTES 1 All terminals with the N w same name are connected together on the module For example the load can be connected to either terminal marked OUT 0 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain to other RTBs always connect the daisy chain as shown If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description
86. provide non isolated field side wiring options each I O module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side Multiple Point Densities ControlLogix diagnostic output modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 20 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Fusing Diagnostic digital outputs have internal electronics to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature protects the module from electrical damage Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or through ladder logic running on a controller For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse see page 6 22 Electronic fuses are also reset through a software IMPORTANT reset or when the diagnostic output module is power cycled Table 4 D Recommended Fuses Circuit Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse Type AC 1756 OA8D 2 Yes Fused on a per Electronically fused point basis DC 1756 OB16D 2 3 Yes Fused on a per Electronically fused point basis 1 Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other code required wiring protection devices 2 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short
87. then shorted Timestamp of diagnostics 5A for 20mS 24V dc Output turned ON into short lms Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Electronically fused per group Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A clamp 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification B when product is marked Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B
88. those points during operation For an example of how to set the Field Power Loss detection diagnostic see page 6 14 Diagnostic Change of State for Input M odules If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled a diagnostic input module sends new data to the owner controller when one of three events occurs e Requested Packet Interval a user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller e Change of State configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON The transitioned input data is sent with the next RPI update e Diagnostic Change of State any change in the diagnostics for a particular input point Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 17 Although the RPI occurs continuously this COS feature allows you to decide whether changes in a module s diagnostic detection should cause the module to send real time data to the owner controller If this feature is enabled the input module sends new data to the owner controller at the RPI on input COS if it is enabled and if a diagnostic fault occurs If this feature is disabled real time data is not sent when a diagnostic fault occurs but is still sent at the specified RPI or on input COS if it is enabled The following featur
89. time While retrieving module identity you can also retrieve the module s status Each module maintains the following information Table 1 C M odule Identification and Status Information Module Identification Description Product Type Module s product type such as Digital 1 0 or Analog I O module Catalog Code Module s catalog number Major Revision Module s major revision number Minor Revision Module s minor revision number Status Module s status Returns the following information e Controller ownership if any e Whether module has been configured e Device Specific Status such as Self Test Flash update in progress Communications fault Not owned outputs in prog mode Internal fault need flash update Run mode Program mode output mods only e Minor recoverable fault e Minor unrecoverable fault e Major recoverable fault e Major unrecoverable fault Vendor ID Serial Number Module manufacturer vendor for example Allen Bradley Module serial number Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module s text string ASCII Text String Number of characters in module s text string IM PORTANT You must perform a WHO service to retrieve this information For more information on how to retrieve module identification information see Appendix B Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 1 6 What Are ControlLogix Digital I O M odules Preventin
90. values returned for each rung Table B 4 Rung Values for Example WHO Ladder Logic Application Rung Destination Description Module Identification Retrieved Rung1 Product Type Module s product type 7 Digital 1 0 10 Analog 1 0 Catalog Code Module s catalog number Rung2 Major Revision Module s major revision Minor Revision Module s minor revision Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 B 16 Using Ladder Logic Table B 4 Rung Values for Example WHO Ladder Logic Application Rung Destination Description Module Identification Retrieved Rung 3 Status Module s status Multiple bits listed Bit 0 0 Unowned 1 Owned Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 0 Unconfigured 1 Configured Bit 3 Reserved Bits 7 4 Forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status 0 Self Test 1 Flash update in progress 2 Communications fault 3 Not owned outputs in prog mode 4 unused 5 Internal fault need flash update 6 Run mode 7 Program mode output mods only Bit 8 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 9 0 No fault 1 Minor unrecoverable fault Bit 10 0 No fault 1 Major recoverable fault Bit 11 0 No fault 1 Major unrecoverable fault Bits 15 12 Unused Rung 4 Vendor ID Module manufacturer vendor 1 Allen Bradley Serial Number Module serial number Rung 5 Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module s text string ASCII Text String Module s
91. want to view or reconfigure Reconfiguring Module Parameters in Remote Run Mode 1 M ake the necessary configuration changes This screen appears ial Henake Papas Local 1 1755 O48 1 11 E Treial Corredi Micakake baes Companion Backplane Tae TEMG Pow TAIE AC Capes Ba P y Esini psag MerrbeHe When the controller is in Remote Run Mode you can change configurable features that are enabled by the software If any feature is disabled greyed out in Remote Run Mode change the controller to Program Mode and make the necessary changes For example the following screen shows the configuration page for the 1756 OB16D module while it is in Remote Run Mode li dedule Propet Local 4 1SE 08 16D 2 1 Bernal Connector Meedia ia Conagua Dimps Pulse Tae Bachata In Remote Run M ode you can change the Fault Mode setting or the state of the outputs when a communications failure occurs in Program M ode aa fala 2 Click here to download Click here to download the new data and the new data and keep close the screen the screen open Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 18 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules Rec onfiguring Module o the eee from Run Mode to Program Mode before Parameters in Program Span ie a Mode Use this pull down menu to switch to Program M ode Make any necessary changes For example the RPI can only be changed in Program Mode and Remote Pro
92. when product or packaging is marked th i Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 36 Module Specific Information 1756 OA8E Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Field Power Loss Detection Enabled 3 17 Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 3 17 Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 output data Program M ode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Program M ode Disabled 6 11 Fault M ode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module L2 0 7 Slolelele Not used Daisy chainto L1 0 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same other RTBs JE OUT 0 Aeaeae Sick Sek Hoot oO
93. 1 0 wiring L1 1 e 7 OUT 1N 0 2 Do not physically connect more DC 2 o 1 2 Dl 9 g OUT 2 N C DC 2 than two wires to a single RTB L1 2 ay u g OUT 2 N O terminal When you use the third L1 3 au 13 Ql OUT 3 N C L1 7 terminal to daisy chain to L1 3 gte 15 E JOUT 3N O other RTBs always connect the J umper bar Cut to length 7 4 aie v E OUT 4 N C daisy chain to the terminal directly 11 4 OUT 4 NO connected to the supply wire as shown a Dr 21 G yee a 3 When using the jumper bar to i 7 Dp 23 a 3 NO v 9 daea chaia eniak oeer Non isolated L1 6 pe 25 DL OUT 6N C y o shown the maximum current winng L1 6 Dp 27 Q OUT 6 N O o you may apply to the module L1 7 Dho 2 g OUT 7 N C e through a single contact point L1 7 NR 31 OUT 7 N O is 8A Ll O L1 7 1E 33 DL Not used 4 The jumper bar part number is je Not used Ne 35 o Not used 0 97739201 Contact your local L2 Rockwell Automation sales 5 representative to order additional y jumper bars if necessary Daisy chain to other RTBs 5 If separate power sources are 30241 M used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic LED indicator 24V eee ee G gt RELAY OUTPUT AK L1 0 i CZD 3 ae are ee Sea es See ae ign OUT 0 N C K Control Bus t CC 8 Interface ty Co ee feng OUT 0 N O Display gt 30344 M 40456 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 1756 OX8I Specifi
94. 16 bidirectional connections Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 7 Rack Connections When a digital I O module is located in a remote chassis with respect to its owner you may select rack optimization or listen only rack optimization in the Communications Format field during initial module configuration This depends on the bridge module 1756 CNB configuration If the CNB is selected for Listen Only rack option then the I O module only allows the Listen Only rack option A rack connection economizes connection usage between the owner and digital I O in the remote chassis Rather than having several direct connections with individual RPI values the owner has a single rack connection with a single RPI value That RPI value accommodates all digital I O modules in the rack connection IM PORTANT Because rack connections are only applicable in applications that use a remote chassis you must configure the Communications Format for both the remote I O module and the remote 1756 CNB module Make sure you configure both modules for Rack Optimization If you choose a different Communications Format for each the controller makes two connections to the same chassis one for each format and the same data travels across ControlNet If you use Rack Optimization for both modules you preserve bandwidth and configure your system to operate more efficiently The input or data echo information is limited to general faults
95. 16I Specifications Number of Inputs 16 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 125mA 5 1V dc amp 3mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 71W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 4 9W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 16 71 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 79 132V ac 47 63Hz Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac On State Current 5mA 79V ac 47 63Hz minimum 15mA 132 V ac 47 63Hz maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 20V ac Maximum Off State Current 2 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 132V ac 8 8kQ 60Hz Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter Ims amp 2ms 10ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter 9ms amp 18ms 8ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of state Timestamp of inputs Software configurable 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable L00us minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperatur
96. 2 16 Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario 2 16 Listen Only Mode lt 3 2 5 4t 6 3 9 Goede a Pe prague dows Boe 2 17 Multiple Owners of Input Modules 2 18 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple OWners 0 0 ccc ee ns 2 19 Chapter Summary and What s Next 05 2 20 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Table of Contents ii ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Chapter 3 What This Chapter Contains 0 00 eee 3 1 Determining Input Module Compatibility 3 1 Determining Output Module Compatibility 3 2 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Modules o4 640 bee ba a ale wad Sweet oe 3 3 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 3 3 Module Fault Reporting assis ie ea ee eee 3 3 Fully Software Configurable 0000 3 3 Flectronic Keying kr Sate Ree Ce EERO EN 3 4 Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs loins e a bead tails at ok Hd 3 7 Producer Consumer Model 000 eee 3 9 LED Status Information 4 46 o yeaa hoes oS 3 10 Full Class I Division 2 Compliance 3 10 CE CSA UL FM Agency Approvals 3 11 Using Features Specific to Standard Input Modules 3 11 Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cycli
97. 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 134 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked i Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 The commutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA OUTPUT TO L2 is 4V us maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range a resistor may be added across the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA I V R At 50mA and above the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for mthe output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at fault Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections awn M aximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor cat
98. 22 Qe 5 IN 2 co oO oLl2 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are L2 3 a 7d IN 3 connected together on the module L2 4 o 12 4 1 9 1G N 4 O O OL1 4 For example L2 can be connected to any terminal marked L2 15 EEE W gt A iy i wa i L2 6 u 13 QI IN 6 Do not physically connect more than 12 7 Dis 15 E IN 7 two wires to a single RTB terminal 12 8 g z IN 8 When you use the second L2 15 Jumper bar Cut to length 2 S terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs L2 9 Qio 19 IN 9 always connect the daisy chain to the Non isolated L2 10 UG 2 a IN 10 2 terminal directly connected to the wiring L2 11 Dla 23 IN 11 supply wire as shown L2 12 Dl 26 25E IN 12 aie 3 The jumper bar part number is L2 13 1D zs 2 DL In 13 Oo 0 gt 97739201 Contact your local L2 14 UD 0 2 DL N 14 p Rockwell Automation sales L2 15 UO 32 31 N 15 O O representative to order additional L2 O 12 15 Dla 33 D Not used jumper bars if necessary Not used El 3 D Not used iT 4 If separate power sources are 5 used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage 30243 M Daisy chain to other RTBs Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V IN 0 9 ACINPUT Cy VV als 2 ot 2 8 12 0 E E ei ST01234567 0 wy x Les pa ST 89 WULBUWB K GND gt 6 Control Bus Display Interface Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 30338 M 20945 Module Specific Information 7 5 1756 1A
99. 3 This wiring example shows GND 1 e t OUT 15 a single voltage source GND 1 E 3 Not used 4 If separate power sources Not used TD 3 so Not used are used do not exceed the a specified isolation voltage 40173 M DC COM Simplified schematic DC Surge Current Chart LED indicator Short Circuit rc Surge Detect gt AN Optoisolation l V a C gt DC OUTPUT Le i ST01234567 3 a Boa Continuous 30 C FIT01234567 E T steguuveus LW h O Continuous 60 C ntsg9nupbus Z _OUT Contro p DIAGNOSTIC Interface Display Output verify No Load tx 2 0 10ms 30343 M Time 40849 M 40463 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 39 1756 0B 16D Specifications Number of Outputs 16 8 points common M odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 250mA 5 1V dc amp 140mA 24V dc Total backplane power 4 64W M ax Power Dissipation M odule 3 3W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 11 25 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 19 2 30V dc Output Current Rating Per Point Per Module 2A max 30 C amp 1A max 60 C Linear derating 8A max 30 C amp 4A max 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 1s Minimum Load Current 3mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 2V dc 2A Max Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON 1ms maximum O
100. 3 Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D Marked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Programmable Controller W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 62 Module Specific Information Cha pter Summary and In this chapter you learned about module specific information Move What s Next on to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Your Module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 What This Chapter Contains Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your Module Troubleshooting Your Module Chapter 8 This chapter describes the indicators on the ControlLogix digital modules and how to use them to troubleshoot the module The following table describes what this chapter contains and its location For information about See page Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your 8 1 Module Using RSLogix 5000 to Troubleshoot Your 8 4 Module Chapter Summary and W hat s Next 8 6 Each ControlLogix I O module has indicators which show individual located on the front of the module LED indicators for input modules I O state yellow fault or fuse status red
101. 4 265V ac 16 pt output module 20 pi 1756 OA8D 74 132V ac 8 pt diagnostic output module 20 pi 1756 OA8E 74 132V ac 8 pt e fused output module 20 pi 1756 0B16D 19 30V dc 16 pt diagnostic output module 36 pi 1756 OB16E 10 31V dc 16 pt e fused output module 20 pi 1756 0B 16 10 30V dc 16 pt isolated output module 36 pi 1756 0B32 10 31V dc 32 pt output module 36 pi 1756 088 10 30V dc 8 pt output module 20 pi 1756 0B8EI 10 30V dc 8 pt e fused isolated output module 36 pi 1756 0C8 30 60V dc 8 pt output module 20 pi 1756 OH8 90 146V dc 8 pt isolated output module 36 pi 1756 ON8 10 30V ac 8 pt output module 20 pi 1756 OV16E 10 31V dc 16 pt e fused sinking current 20 pi output module 1756 OW 16l 10 265V 16 pt isolated relay output module 36 pi 1756 OX8 10 265V 5 150V dc 8 pt isolated relay normally 36 pi open normally closed output module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 1 4 What Are ControlLogix Digital I O M odules Features of the ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules ControlLogix I O M odule 77 DC OUTPUT 8 _ Indicators a st 0123456 A1 Locking tab _ Removable Terminal Block _ e wet e D Ol J o el ID Top an F
102. 56 A4 ControlLogix Chassis Installation Instructions 1756 IN080B AT A10 A13 1756 PA72 ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1756 5 67 PB72 1756 PA75 ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1756 5 78 PB75 1756 Series ControlLogix M odule Installation Instructions Each module has separate installation document Multiple 1756 IN numbers 1756 Series ControlLogix System User M anual 1756 UM 001 1756 Series ControlLogix Analog I O M odules User M anual 1756 6 5 9 1756 CNB ControlLogix ControlN et Interface M odule User 1756 6 5 3 CNBR M anual 1756 DHRIO ControlLogix Data Highway Plus Communication 1756 6 5 14 Interface M odule User M anual 1756 ENET ControlLogix Ethernet Communication Interface 1756 UM 051 M odule User M anual If you need more information on these products contact your local Allen Bradley integrator or sales office for assistance For more information on the documentation refer to the Allen Bradley Publication Index publication SD499 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Table of Contents Chapter 1 What This Chapter Contains 0 ccc cece eee 1 1 What are ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 1 1 Using an I O Module in the ControlLogix System 1 2 Features of the ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 1 4 Using Module Identification and
103. 56 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Disable Keying The inserted module attempts to accept a connection to the controller regardless of its type Be extremely cautious when using the disable ATTENTION keying option if used incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss If keying is disabled a controller makes a connection with most modules of the same type as that used in the slot configuration For example if a slot is configured for a 1756 IA16I standard input module and a 1756 IB16 standard input module is inserted into the slot the controller established a connection because keying is disabled A controller will not establish a connection if any of the following conditions exist even if keying is disabled e The slot is configured for one module type e g input module and a module of another type e g output module is inserted in the slot e The module inserted into the slot cannot accept some portion of the configuration For example if a standard input module is inserted into a slot configured for a diagnostic input module the controller cannot make a connection because the module cannot accept process the diagnostic configuration ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 7 Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs Controllers generate a 64 bit Coordinated System Time CST for their respective chassis The CST i
104. 6V dc for 1 second 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac max continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D 3 M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 14 Module Specific Information 1756 1B 32 Configurable features The fol
105. 6V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade W idth for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification i Listed Industrial Control Equipment when product or packaging is marked Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D Marked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 50 Module Specific Information 1756 0C8 Configurable features The following table lists
106. 73 23 EEC Low Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific information required by EN 61131 2 see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the Allen Bradley publication Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines For Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 Open style devices must be provided with environmental and safety protection by proper mounting in enclosures designed for specific application conditions See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide with over 75 sales support offices 512 authorized distributors and 260 authorized systems integrators located throughout the United States alone as well as Rockwell Automation representatives in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for e sales and order support e product technical training e warranty support e support service agreements Technical Product Assistance If you need to contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance please review the troubleshooting information first If the problem persists then call your local Rockwell Automation representative Your Questions or Comme
107. 8C EN P M arch 2001 4 2 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Determining Diagnostic Output M odule Compatibility Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 When designing a system using ControlLogix input modules you must consider e the voltage necessary for your application e whether you need a solid state device e current leakage e if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company products to ControlLogix input modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG 2 1 ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a variety of output devices Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix outputs include e motor starters e solenoids e indicators When designing a system e make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation e make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads check the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the device The ControlLogix outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix inputs The exceptions are the ac and dc diagnostic input modules When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information on the compatibility of motor start
108. A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 24 Module Specific Information 1756 1V16 Configurable Features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF lms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module __ IN 1 IN 0 o Hep Heo IN 3 l 1 IN 2 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name Group 0 D Group 0 are connected together on the IN 5 ie ice IN 4 module For example DC can Dai 3 be connected to either terminal ERA IN 7 IGS ie IN 6 marked DC 1 oe eae E 2 Do not physically connect more than DC 0 t ie I DC 0 uae two wires to a single RTB terminal a i 7 e ee IN 9 a IN 8 9 oT When you daisy chain from a group LINE to another RTB always connect the IN 11 i IN 10 daisy chain as shown
109. ASCII text string description Using Tags in Ladder Logic When using tags in ControlLogix digital I O ladder logic applications you must remember the following e Ladder logic tags represent the module on a point per bit basis For example point 0 bit 0 on the module e If you are performing a service through the tags a value of 0 prevents the action from occurring and a value of 1 causes the action to occur For example if you want to reset the electronic fuse on a particular bit enter 1 in the tags e If you are checking the response of a service through the tags a value of 0 means the bit passed the service and a value of 1 means the bit failed the service For example if you perform a pulse test and the response displays a 0 for a particular bit the bit passed the test Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Appendix C Power Supply Sizing Chart Use the following chart to check the power your ControlLogix chassis is using Table C 1 Power Supply Sizing Chart Slot Module Current 5 1V Power Current Power 24 Current Power Number Catalog DC mA 5 1V DC 24 VDC Watts 3 3V DC 3 3V DC Number Watts VDC mA mA Watts 0 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 1 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 2 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 3 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 4 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 5 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 6 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 7 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 8 X5
110. CST timestamp is also updated O disable 1 enable DiagCOSDisable Configuration Diagnostic Change of State Triggers the module to transmit diagnostic per module status data with an updated timestamp as soon as the diagnostic data changes state Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Software Configuration Tags A 7 Table A 6 Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or I O Data FaultLatchEn Configuration Fault is Latched If enabled for a point any OpenW ire or FieldPwrLoss will 1 bit per point stay latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer exists until the User clears the fault O disable 1 enable latching FieldPwrLossEn Configuration Field Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 1 bit per point O disable 1 enable FilterOnOff_0_7 etc Configuration Filter Times ON to OFF Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for 1 byte per group ON to OFF transition Operates on groups of 8 points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18ms Valid AC filter times 1 2ms FilterOffOn_0 7 etc Configuration Filter Times OFF to ON Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules 1 byte per group for OFF to ON transition Operates on groups of 8 points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2ms Valid AC filter times 1 2ms OpenWireEn Configuration Open Wire Enables Open Wire diagnostic 1 bit per point
111. Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module i NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name Isolated DC 0 k enp o l8 2 1 D_ IN o o o DC 0 are connected together on the wiring DC 1 o GND 1 E 3G IN l o o o DC1 module For example DC can be GND 2 1 6 5 IN 2 connected to either terminal GND 3 ie 8 0 IN 3 marked GND 15 Source Input wiring GND 4 110 9 g IN 4 Sink 2 Do not physically connect more DC 5 o 60 4 GND 5 TE 2 ug IN 5 o DC S Input than two wires to a single RTB DC 6 o o op CND 6 iu 3o IN 6 o DC 6 wiring terminal W hen you use the GND 7 1 1 s4 IN 7 second GND 15 terminal to daisy GND 8 G 18 17 IN 8 chain to other RTBs always Jumper bar Cut SEN GND 9 2 196 IN 9 connect the daisy chain as shown GND 10 i 22 26 IN 10 20 O 3 Each input can be wired in a sink GND 11 q 24 23 N 11 o o or source configuration Non isolated GND 12 19 26 25 IN 12 o as shown wiring GND 13 19 28 26 N 13 6 4 The jumper bar part number is GND 14 Ey 30 29 IN 14 o 97739201 Contact your local GND 15 Ep 32 31 IN 15 o o Rockwell Automation sales DCt o GND 15 E sE Not used DC representative to order additional we Not used GD 36 35 7 Not used jumper bars 7 if necessary 5 If separate power sou
112. Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 4 Module Specific Information 1756 1A 161 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF 9ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module L2 0o 12 0 1 IN 0 o o oLL0 rtia L2 1 fe l4 3 IN 1 oi 1
113. F and the fault appears in the OFF state until that point is reset 3 When pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display 4 The output cannot turn ON due to hardware point damage 5 Depending on me characteristics of an applied short circuit an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned OFF 6 During normal operating conditions hardware damage should not be possible An output shorted to GND may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to GND as a possible cause Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 14 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 The following features are available on all ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time Your ControlLogix input module will send data in one of two ways e Requested Packet Interval a user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer e Change of State configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON The data will be sent at the RPI rate The default setti
114. IFM P 2 1 2 Using the NEMA clamp RTB 5 4 Using the removable terminal block RTB P 3 1 2 5 2 5 4 Using the spring clamp RTB 5 4 Wiring Example 1756 IA16 module 7 2 1756 IA16 module 7 4 7 30 1756 IA8D module 7 6 1756 IB16 module 7 8 7 24 1756 IB16D module 7 10 1756 IB161 module 7 12 1756 IB32 module 7 14 7 26 1756 IC16 module 7 16 1756 IH16 module 7 18 Index 7 1756 IM 161 module 7 20 1756 IN16 module 7 22 1756 IV16 module 7 24 1756 0A16 module 7 28 1756 0A16I module 7 30 1756 OA8 module 7 32 1756 OA8D module 7 34 1756 OA8E module 7 36 1756 OB16D module 7 38 1756 OB16E module 7 40 7 56 1756 OB16 module 7 42 1756 0B32 module 7 44 1756 OB8 module 7 46 1756 OB8El module 7 48 1756 0C8 module 7 50 1756 OH8I module 7 52 1756 ON8 module 7 54 1756 OV16E module 7 56 1756 OW 16 module 7 58 1756 OX8I module 7 60 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Index 8 Notes Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 AB Allen Bradley aT Publication Problem Report If you find a problem with our documentation please complete and return this form Pub Title Type ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules User M anual Cat No 1756 Series Pub No 1756 UM 058C EN P Pub Date March 2001 PartNo 957345 93 Check Problem s Type Describe Problem s Internal Use Only L Technical Accuracy C text C illustration L Completeness procedure step C illustration C definition C in
115. Iocke sontraller BiEar Faults a io Faults After you change the configuration data for a module the change does not actually take affect until you download the new information Using Software Configuration Tags A 15 RSLogix 5000 verifies the download process with this pop up screen Download x Download to the controller Name Userdoc Type 1756 L1 4 1756 M0 0 LOGIX5550 Using this communications configuration Driver AB_DF1 1 Path Click here to download new data This completes the download process Sample Series of Tags 1756 IA 16 The set of tags associated with a 1756 IA16I module that was configured using CST Timestamped Input Data for its Communications Format is shown below The configurable features for this configuration are as follows e Filter Times e Change of State When you access the tags for this module as described on page A 11 you see the screen below Coste Tage pm Dec ueeerd oneer Bong Un Ceea E U Bae fag H ama Eii sial 7 aoe Filter times for groups of points nL i L Bescarad a Dema Loca TE Pikes ri L Daina Local TE Fank 15 4 Dacin Lost TE Fiegen 15 73 1 Tecin Lock LC Fite in E M5 73 a Teina Look TE Fian 24 71 1 Deina Locat Ti Fites inl f_2a_3l Tosca Change of state ON to OFF or OFF to ON Local Lic COSI WER ECE Loeat 1E EEA TEM D aN fa Locat 1 Fink TEEME a L jE
116. M arch 2001 3 12 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Using Features Specific to Standard Output M odules Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules ControlLogix input modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options Some applications require power for the I O circuits to originate on separate isolated power sources Because these conditions require separate commons for each channel some input modules use individual isolation or point to point isolation Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix input modules are channel to channel isolation and no isolation Your application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use Multiple Point Densities ControlLogix input modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application The following features are common to all ControlLogix standard digital output modules Configurable Point Level Output Fault States Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states either ON OFF or Last State in case of a communications failure or program mode IM PORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters the program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs turn off during program mode whenever that m
117. M odule specific information 7 34 1756 OA8E M odule specific information 7 36 1756 0B 16D M odule specific information 7 38 1756 OB 16E M odule specific information 7 40 1756 OB 161 M odule specific information 7 42 1756 0832 M odule specific information 7 44 1756 0B8 M odule specific information 7 46 1756 OB 8El M odule specific information 7 48 Index 1756 0C8 M odule specific information 7 50 1756 OH8I M odule specific information 7 52 1756 ON8 M odule specific information 7 54 1756 OV16E M odule specific information 7 56 1756 OW 16l M odule specific information 7 58 1756 OX8l M odule specific information 7 60 A Accessing Module Tags A 11 Agency Certification Class Division 2 UL CSA FM and CE 1 1 3 10 3 11 4 10 4 11 Bidirectional Connections 2 6 2 8 C Cage Clamp RTB 5 4 CE Certification 1 1 3 11 4 11 Change of State Diagnostic change of state 4 16 Change of State COS P 2 2 10 3 11 4 14 4 16 6 12 A 2 Diagnostic modules 4 16 4 25 Class I Division 2 Certification 1 1 3 10 4 10 Communications Producer consumer model 2 9 2 14 Communications Format P 2 6 3 6 6 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5 6 7 CST timestamped fuse data output data 6 7 CST timestamped fuse data scheduled output data 6 8 CST timestamped input data 6 6 Full diagnostic output data 6 7 Full diagnostic input data 6 6 Full diagnostics scheduled output data 6 8 Input module formats 6 6 Listen only 6 6 6 8 Li
118. N to OFF 5ms maximum Diagnostic Functions Short trip 8A 180ms minimum 10A 120ms minimum No load OFF STATE detection only Output verification ON STATE detection only Pulse test User selectable maximum pulse width Time stamp of diagnostics lms Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Fusing Electronically fused per point Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screw driver Blade W idth for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency C
119. O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Timestamping In Conjunction with Scheduled Outputs Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the full diagnostics scheduled outputs feature so that after input data changes state and a timestamp occurs an output point will actuate at some configured time in the future You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs you must e choose a Communications Format for each diagnostic input and diagnostic output module that allows timestamping For more information on choosing a Communications Format see Chapter 6 e have a controller in the same rack as both I O modules e disable Change of State for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped For scheduled outputs to work most effectively TIP i remember the following es e The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for any controller backplane and network delays e The I O modules must reside in the same rack as the timemaster For a detailed example of how to write ladder logic to use these features see Appendix B ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 9 Module M ajor Revision Considerations with Timestamping When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O modules remember the following conditions that may occur depending on the module s Majo
120. O disable 1 enable Input Data Tags Table A 7 Diagnostic Input M odule Input Data Tags Name as listed in Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or I O Data CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to 8 bytes indicate the time that data changed see COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn FieldPwrLossEn Data Input data Off On status for the input point 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 On Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and 1 bit per point input data for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module will be faulted by the processor 0 no fault 1 fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault FieldPwrLoss Input Data Field Power Loss AC input diagnostic detects that field power has failed 1 bit per point or is disconnected from the module Open Wire will also be detected 0 no fault 1 fault OpenWire Input data Open Wire Diagnostic which detects that a wire has been disconnected 1 bit per point from the input point If a group of points all show this fault then possibly the return L1 or GND is missing from the module Also see FieldPwrLoss 0 no fault 1 fault
121. ON ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 60V peak Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm2 stranded 2 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 134 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification Uy Listed Industrial Control Equipment when product or packaging is marked Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D
122. On State Voltage Drop 200mV dc 0 5A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 0 5mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON lms maximum ON to OFF lms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification i J Listed Industrial Control Equip
123. Output is shorted to 2 Fuse Blown bit is set 2 Pulse Test fails3 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the One of the following output as ON output as OFF 1 No Load 2 Pulse Test fails 2 No Load bit is set 2 Output is shorted to 3 Pulse Test passes DC 3 No power to the module 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the Hardware point output as OFF damage 2 Pulse Test fails output as ON 2 Output Verify sets a bit 1 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based ona hermal cutout principal In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its hermal cutout temperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below he minimum detect level of 19 2V dc The output channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master PU Bridge etc What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs 2 Itis not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the OFF state If a short circuit occurs the output point is turned OF
124. Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 1 bit per point O disable 1 enable NoLoadEn Configuration No Load Enables No Load diagnostic 1 bit per point O disable 1 enable OutputVerifyEn Configuration Output Verify Enables Output Verify diagnostic 1 bit per point O disable 1 enable Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Software Configuration Tags A 9 Table A 8 Diagnostic Output M odule Configuration Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data ProgM ode Configuration Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state 1 bit per point of outputs when the controller is in Program M ode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue OFF or ON 1 Hold Last State ProgValue Configuration Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgM ode to configure the state 1 bit per point of outputs when the controller is in Program M ode See ProgM ode 0 Off 1 On ProgToFaultEn Configuration Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transitioning of 1 byte per module outputs to FaultM ode if a communications failure occurs in Program M ode Otherwise outputs will remain in ProgramM ode See ProgM ode ProgValue FaultM ode FaultValue O outputs stay in ProgramM ode if comm failure 1 outputs got to FaultM ode if comm failure Input Data Tags Table A 9 Diagnostic Output M odule Input Data Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition
125. S0mA Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA 0 2V us for loads lt S0mA Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 60V peak Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User side to system side 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Softw are configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 134 Screw driver Blade W idth for R
126. TB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked Uy Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D 3 M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 The commutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA OUTPUT TO L2 is 4V us maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range a resistor may be added across the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA I V R At 50mA and above the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for mthe output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at fault Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections ewn M aximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual Refer to publi
127. Table of Contents iii Timestamping Inputs and Scheduling Outputs 4 7 Producer Consumer Model 000 000s 4 9 LED Status Information vo ae ae Sra Rete ew a ec 4 10 Full Class I Division 2 Compliance 4 10 CE CSA UL FM Agency Approvals 4 11 Diagnostic Latch of Information 4 11 Diagnostic Timestamp o 32 5 sseeee ke Awe Scat 4 11 8 Point AC 16 Point DC lt s5 6458 tise ated ee hee 4 12 Point Level Fault Reporting 000005 4 12 Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 4 14 Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time 4 14 Software Configurable Filter Times 4 14 Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules 4 14 Multiple Point Densities 0 0000 e eee 4 15 Open Wire Detection 0 ee eee eee nee 4 15 Field Power Loss Detection 000000 4 16 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 4 16 Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 4 17 Configurable Point Level Output Fault States 4 17 Output Data PONG 4 isnah aie ede prada ea ceita esate Boats 4 18 Field Wiring Options 0 0 cee eee eee 4 19 Multiple Point Densities 0 000 ee eee 4 19 PUSHING ade saree dat ois gel boasting ulated aed es eee ela 4 20 No Load Dee COM 4 4 unk eh oe AN AOR ea ces 4 21 Field Side Output Verification 0 0 4 22 Pulses Test 053k a
128. Ue dee 1 eH prm 7 1 1 Select Controller Tags Feim E Ferie 2 Click on the right mouse Pate 1TH 0 button to display the menu 3 Select M onitor Tags ii Moe A dee irori Prog a You can view the tags from here ee ne gt jim dm ee Click on the slot number of the module you want to see mehea re a j Because the process of viewing and changing a module s configuration tags is broader in scope than can be addressed in this chapter you must turn to Appendix A for more information and sample tag collections Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 24 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about J What s Next e configuring ControlLogix digital I O modules e configuration tags e editing module configuration Move on to Chapter 7 Module Specific Information Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Chapter 7 Module Specific Information What This Chapter Contains This chapter provides module specific information for all ControlLogix igital modules The information is separated by module and includes a list of e configurable functions e wiring diagrams e LED indicators e simplified schematics e surge currents when applicable The following table lists where module specific information can be found ControlL
129. a single RTB IN 9 ic GP IN 8 terminal When you daisy chain gt it t from a group to another RTB N i Nil G N 10 always connect the daisy chain 2 i WS as shown Group 1 IN 13 WW IN 12 Group 1 3 This wiring example shows a IN 15 ie EDI ners single voltage source T E 4 If separate power sources are GND 1 IGS lp used do not exceed the specified ERNER isolation voltage DC COM 40177 M Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V IN 0 Sil DC INPUT C 3 ows kK LY ST012345670 A ST 89DURBUB K Nias ControlBus Display or Interface 30183 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Module Specific Information 7 9 1756 1B 16 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 56W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 5 1W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 10 31 2V dc Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc On State Current 2 0mA 10V dc minimum 10mA 31 2V dc maximum M aximum Off State Voltage 5V M aximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 31 2V dc 3 12kQ Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter Oms 1ms or 2ms 1ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms 2ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Function
130. al output modules are standard output modules e 1756 OA16 e 1756 OA16I e 1756 OA8 e 1756 OA8E e 1756 OB16E e 1756 OB16I e 1756 OB32 e 1756 OB8 e 1756 OB8EI e 1756 0C8 e 1756 OH8I e 1756 ON8 e 1756 OW16I e 1756 OX8I The configurable features for a standard output module are e Output State in Program Mode e Output State in Fault Mode e Transition from Program State to Fault State e Field Power Loss Detection 1756 OA8E only e Diagnostic Latching 1756 OA8E only Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4 Use the following page to configure your standard output module Module Frugal Local 2 i7 0AE FI diagnostic latching here EEE paea lela be paha Ls Y A piur ballin UE Leap calle in Fiag Mie dia Pagar Mode 7 hanp sipi bofe Wee sabe cme _ ctr R mn __ Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 14 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules Configuring a Diagnostic The following ControlLogix digital input modules are diagnostic Input Module input modules e 1756 IA8D e 1756 IB16D The configurable features for a diagnostic input module are e Input Change of State e Input Filter Times e Open Wire Detection e Field Power Loss Detection e Diagnostic Latching e Diagnostic Change of State Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4 Use the following pages to configure your diagnostic input module Mockele Propeerters Lo
131. allows you to add or delete tags but not change values 1 Select Controller Tags 2 Click on the right mouse button to display the menu 3 Select M onitor Tags Click on the slot number of the module you want to see Configuration information is listed for each point on the module located at Local 2 C Peo ed Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 A 12 Using Software Configuration Tags Changing Configuration Some configurable features are changed on a module wide basis and Through the Tags some on a point by point basis IM PORTANT Although you can change the value for any point in the tags the module s configuration is not updated until you download the information see page A 14 Module Properties Dialog Pull down this menu and click here to go offline Once you are offline you can make configuration changes Module wide Configurable Features For features such as Program to Fault enable that are configured on a module wide basis highlight the value and type in the new value Controller Tags User_Documentation controller OL x Scope User_Documentatior 7 Show Showa l Sort Tas Name 7 A Local 1 C AB 1756_ In the Data M onitor Local 1 ERS i AB 1756_ raa Local 2 C taal AB 1756_ 1 Highlight the value here
132. and detect whether they are ON or OFF ControlLogix input modules convert ac or dc ON OFF signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor Typical input devices include e proximity switches e limit switches e selector switches e float switches e pushbutton switches Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 2 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Determining Output Module Compatibility Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 When designing a system using ControlLogix input modules you must consider e the voltage necessary for your application e whether you need a solid state device e current leakage e if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company products to ControlLogix input modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG 2 1 ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a variety of output devices Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix outputs include e motor starters e solenoids e indicators When designing a system e make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation e make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads check the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and
133. and data No additional status e g diagnostic is available IM PORTANT Each controller can only establish 255 connections in any combination of direct or rack In other words you can use a rack connection between an owner controller and multiple remote I O modules while simultaneously using a direct connection between that same controller and any other I O modules in the same remote chassis Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 8 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System In this example the owner is still communicating with all I O in the remote chassis but has used only one connection The data from all three modules is sent together simultaneously at the RPI This option eliminates the need for three separate connections Using a Rack Connection with 1 0 in a Remote Chassis Local chassis Remote chassis TAN ran F A Owner controller ControlN et Bridge module ControlNet Bridge module 42 8 R EL B B E H Rack connection for a 1 0 in remote chassis coon gt ocos AaAcUv2a2 Aacuv acCcO AaAcuUv2a ControINet 41021 IM PORTANT Rack connections are only available to digital I O
134. apacity between the housing options IM PORTANT The housings shown are used with a spring clamp RTB but the capacity for each remains the same regardless of RTB type Standard Depth Housing Extended Depth Maximum Area 628mm2 36 18AWG wires 23 14AWG wires Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 40 14AWG wires 30484 M IM PORTANT The housings maintain the following maximum areas standard depth housing maximum area 336mm extended depth housing maximum area 628mm Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 9 Suggestions for Using the Extended Depth Housing Consider the following recommendations when deciding to use an extended depth housing on your I O module It is recommended you use the 1756 TBE when e using gt 36 18AWG wires e using gt 23 14AWG wires Cabinet Size Considerations With the Extended Depth Housing When you use an extended depth housing 1756 TBE the I O module depth is increased The diagram below shows the difference in terms of depth between an I O module using a standard depth housing and one using an extended depth housing 144 73mm al 5 698in 12 7mm 131 75mm gt 0 5in lt 3 18mm 0 125in 5 187in ie IO CO uated Standard Depth Housing el Extended Depth Housing ene Rear Surface of ControlLogix Chassis
135. aracteristics Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 e module he load The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an y associated with that channel will be stalled externally and properly sized to ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 17 Field Power Loss Detection The Field Power Loss detection feature is found on the following standard output module e 1756 OA8E When field power to the module is lost or zero cross cannot be detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted IM PORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation For an example of how to enable Field Power Loss detection see page 6 14 Diagnostic Latch of Information The Diagnostic Latch of Information feature is found on the following standard output module e 1756 OA8E Diagnostic Latching allows this module to latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch service For an example of how to enable or reset diagnostic latches see page 6 14 mE Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or when the I O module s power is cycled Publication 1756 UM
136. are to match according to vendor and catalog number In this case the minor revision of the module must greater than or equal to that of the configured slot Connection The communication mechanism from the controller to another module in the control system ControlBus The backplane used by the 1756 chassis Coordinated system time CST Timer value which is kept synchronized for all modules within a single ControlBus chassis Direct connection An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules Disable keying An electronic keying protection mode that requires no attributes of the physical module and the module configured in the software to match Download The process of transferring the contents of a project on the workstation into the controller Electronic keying A feature where modules can be requested to perform an electronic check to make sure that the physical module is consistent with what was configured by the software Exact match An electronic keying protection mode that requires the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor catalog number major revision and minor revision Field side Interface between user field wiring and I O module Inhibit A ControlLogix process that allows you to configure an 1 0 module but prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the control
137. ation Value Specification Value Number of Outputs 16 N O Contacts individually isolated UL Ratings C300 R150 Pilot Duty Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Backplane Current 150mA 5 1V dc amp 150mA 24V dc Total backplane power 4 37W Initial Contact Resistance 30mQ Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 4 5W 60 C Switching Frequency 1 operation 3s 0 3Hz at rated load maximum Thermal Dissipation 15 35 BTU hr Bounce Time 1 2ms mean Output Voltage Range 10 265V 47 63Hz 5 150V dc Expected Contact Life 300k cycles resistive 100k cycles inductive Output Voltage Range 5 30V dc 2A resistive Isolation Voltage load dependent 48V dc 0 5A resistive Channel to channel 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 125V dc 0 25A resistive 265V ac maximum continuous voltage 125V ac 2A resistive User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 240V ac 2A resistive 265V ac maximum continuous voltage Output Current Rating Resistive Power Rating 250W maximum for 125V ac resistive output at rating power 2A 5 30V dc steady state 480W maximum for 240V ac resistive output 0 5A 48V dc 60W maximum for 30V dc resistive output 0 25V 125V dc 24W maximum for 48V dc resistive output 2A 125V ac 31W maximum for 125V dc resistive output 2A 240V ac 250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output Inductive 480VA maximum for 240V ac inductive output 2A steady stat
138. ation after you have made changes all the controllers will reestablish communication with the input module If multiple controllers have different configuration after you have made changes only one controller the first one to send changes to the module will reestablish communications with the input module Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about What s Next e ownership and connections e direct connections e rack connections e input module operation e output module operation Move to Chapter 3 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Chapter 3 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes devices compatible with Controllogix I O and features that are specific to various modules Determining Input Module Compatibility For information about See page Determining Input M odule Compatibility 3 1 Determining Output M odule Compatibility 3 2 Using Features Common to ControlLogix 3 3 Standard Digital I O Modules Using Features Specific to Standard Input 3 11 M odules Using Features Specific to Standard Output 3 12 M odules Fault and Status Reporting Between Input 3 18 Modules and Controllers Fault and Status Reporting Between Output 3 19 Modules and Controller Chapter Summary and W hat s Next 3 21 ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices
139. ation with the control system Each ControlLogix I O module must continuously maintain communication with its owner to operate normally Typically each module in the system will have only 1 owner Input modules can have more than 1 owner Output modules however are limited to a single owner For more information on the increased flexibility provided by multiple owners and the ramifications of using multiple owners see page 2 13 The I O configuration portion of RSLogix5000 generates the configuration data for each I O module in the control system whether the module is located in a local or remote chassis A remote chassis also known as networked contains the I O module but not the module s owner controller Configuration data is transferred to the controller during the program download and subsequently transferred to the appropriate I O modules 1 0 Modules in Local Chassis I O modules in the same chassis as the controller are ready to run as soon as the configuration data has been downloaded Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 3 1 0 Modules in Remote Chassis You must run RSNetWorx to enable I O modules in the networked chassis Running RSNetWorx transfers configuration data to networked modules and establishes a Network Update Time NUT for ControlNet The NUT is compliant with the desired communications options specified for each module during configuration IM PORTANT If you are not using I O modul
140. ault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module a DC 0 Isolated NOTES 1 All terminals with the same Isolated DC 0 o eae D eb ore 7 sourcing name are connected together on wiring Dc 2 1 E 4 3 a OUT 1 j output the module For example DC ENQ DC 2 TD s D1 OUT 2 o DC 2 wiring can be connected to either DC 3 je 7 OUT 3 terminal marked DC 15 Sink outo win DC 4 po 9 OUT 4 2 Do not physically connect more Ne Seve nag DC 5 j2 u OUT 5 than two wires to a single RTB DC 6 of 1 DC 6 T I 4 3 OUT 6 o DC 6 terminal When you use the DC 7 1G jie 15 g OUT 7 second DC 15 terminal to J umper bar Cut to length DC 8 18 17 OUT 8 daisy chain to other RTBs DC 9 TE z2 ig OUT 9 connect the daisy chain t DC 10 E z2 21 OUT 10 m as shown a i 3 Outputs can be wired in a sink or Non isolated DC 11 A FE OuUT 11 i source configuration as shown AP DC 12 25 OUT 12 Non isolated D ming DC 13 1D 28 27 OUT 13 F sourcing 4 The jumper bar part number is DC 14 30 29 OUT 14 7 output 97739201 Contact your local DC 15 D32 31 QUT 15 wirin Rockwell Automation sales DC o pc 15 O 3D Not used g representative to order rs Not used 1G 36 3s Not used 9 additional jumper bars if 7 DC necessary O 5 If separate power sources are ae f used do not exceed the Daisy chain to other RTBs 30242 M specified isolation voltage Simplified schema
141. by the owner controller It s tag name is OutputVerify For more information on output verify see page 4 22 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits But because the module is an 8 point module only the first 8 bits bits0 7 are used in the Module Fault Word Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 28 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Fault bits in the Fuse Blown Word Field Power Loss Word No Load Word and Output Verify Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things It can indicate e A communications fault In this case all 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density e A fuse blown condition In this case only the bit affected is set to 1 e A field power loss condition In this case only the bit affected is set to 1 e A no load condition In this case only the bit affected is set to 1 e An output verify condition In this case only the bit affected is set to 1 The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital output modules Bit 31 Bit 0 Module Fault Word m A c
142. c Time 3 11 Software Configurable Filter Times 3 11 Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules 3 12 Multiple Point Densities 000000 eee 3 12 Using Features Specific to Standard Output Modules 3 12 Configurable Point Level Output Fault States 3 12 Output Data Echo 22 35 vudnee obo ea ete Maes 3 13 Field Wiring OpiOnS lt 33643 ee es er hrG oe ess 3 14 Multiple Point Densities 0 000000 eee 3 14 FUSING spittle tearing E eed wh wb aeee he ene 3 14 Field Power Loss Detection 0000005 3 17 Diagnostic Latch of Information 3 17 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and COMMIOMECTS sca sk Sy ieihe wie acc Mk wae ee BS 3 18 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and COMMON ang bbe rhe eset AG Seg we ROR ee BA 3 19 Chapter Summary and What s Next 00 3 21 Chapter 4 What This Chapter Contains 4 064 scant aces eo rhiek S65 4 1 Determining Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 4 1 Determining Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 4 2 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Modules tact cats gel nthe aaah ae ts Ogata 4 3 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 4 3 Module Fault Reporting 0cc eee eeecee 4 3 Fully Software Configurable 1 ce eee 4 3 Electronic REYANG lt 6s3s Grbac a we OGG A ROL RCE 4 4 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module
143. cal 2 1755 14 21 Enable Change of State here Tra F F F Change filter i F F Fe F z A Enable Open Wire here p E hE z z times here l i F F E F E Enable Field Power Loss here i z E eF F 7 F F f F F Enable Diagnostic Latching here ht j E eF T k E E F E Enable Change of State for F nbe Changs of Sate tor Cangreche Traraitoru Diagnostic Transitions here Coed cftuct Meas Fhe e One diagnostic Reset Latched Diagnostics is not used when writing configuration but is typically accessed during online monitoring For more information on how to reset Latched Diagnostics see page 6 21 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 15 Configuring a Diagnostic The following ControlLogix digital output modules are diagnostic Output M odule output modules e 1756 OA8D e 1756 OB16D The configurable features for a diagnostic output module are e Output State in Program Mode e Output State in Fault Mode e Transition from Program State to Fault State e Field Power Loss Detection 1756 OA8D amp 1756 OA8E only e No Load Detection e Diagnostic Latching e Output Verify Detection Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4 Use the following pages to configure your diagnostic output module his Properties Lana g 17 Shae Z ij Set the Program M ode value here z z F F Enable Field Power p a E E p
144. cation 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 32 M odule Specific Information 1756 0A8 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example L1 can be connected to any terminal marked L1 0 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown This wiring example shows a single voltage source If separate power sources are used do not exceed the Specified isolation voltage N w E a Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module n l L1 0 ES I1 OUT 0 Hite ID 1 0 IE iE oT Group 0 L1 0 HID A OUT 2 i l z OUT 3 Daisy chain we I I i to other 4 LL HES ff No
145. cations Module Specific Information 7 61 Specification Value Specification Value Number of Outputs 8N 0 amp 8 N C 2 points common UL Ratings C300 R150 Pilot Duty Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V dc amp 100mA 24V dc Total backplane power 2 91W Initial Contact Resistance 30mQ Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 3 1W 60 C Switching Frequency 1 operation 3s 0 3Hz at rated load maximum Thermal Dissipation 10 57 BTU hr Bounce Time 1 2ms mean Output Voltage Range 10 265V 47 63Hz 5 150V dc Expected Contact Life 300k cycles resistive 100k cycles inductive Output Voltage Range 5 30V dc 2A resistive Isolation Voltage load dependent 48V dc 0 5A resistive Channel to channel 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 125V dc 0 25A resistive 265V ac maximum continuous voltage 125V ac 2A resistive User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 240V ac 2A resistive 265V ac maximum continuous voltage Output Current Rating Resistive Power Rating steady state 250W maximum for 125V ac resistive output at rating power 2A 5 30V dc 480W maximum for 240V ac resistive output 0 5A 48V dc 60W maximum for 30V dc resistive output 0 25A 125V dc 24W maximum for 48V dc resistive output 2A 125V ac 31W maximum for 125V dc resistive output 2A 240V ac 250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output Inductive 480VA maxim
146. ctor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 26 Module Specific Information 1756 1V32 NOTES 1 Nn w a All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example DC COM can be connected to either terminal marked GND 1 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF lms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module IN 2 pl n o 4 LL IN 3 la 3 N 2 o IN 5 le 5E IN 4 IN 7 la 7 IN 6 Group 0 IN 9 j10 9 IN 8 Group 0 IN 11 j2 un IN 10 IN 13 g u 13 s Daisy chain to N 15 146 Me l ais other RTBs Dc 1 Fe v N 17 J 20 19 N 19 z2 21 N 21 4 23 J umper N 23 E 26 25
147. ding on how the module is configured Configuration Tags Table A 1 Standard Input M odule Configuration Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data COSOnOffEn Configuration Change of State ON to OFF Triggers an event in the controller for ON to Lbit per point OFF transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated O disable 1 enable COS OffOnEn Configuration Change of State OFF to ON Triggers an event in the controller for OFF to 1 bit per point ON transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated O disable 1 enable FilterOnOff_0_7 etc Configuration Filter Times ON to OFF Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for 1 byte per group ON to OFF transition Operates on groups of 8 points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18ms Valid AC filter times 1 2ms FilterOffOn_0 7 etc Configuration Filter Times OFF to ON Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules 1 byte per group for OFF to ON transition Operates on groups of 8 points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2ms Valid AC filter times 1 2ms Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 A 4 Using Software Configuration Tags Input Data Tags Table A 2 Standard Input M odule Input Data Tags Name as listedin Configura
148. dule health and operational status of a module The LED displays vary for each module The following status can be checked with the LED indicators e I O status This yellow display indicates the ON OFF state of the field device I O status indicator does not illuminate without field power applied e Module status This green display indicates the module s communication status e Fault status This display is only found on some modules and indicates the presence or absence of various faults e Fuse status This display is only found on electronically fused modules and indicates the state of the module s fuse For examples of LED indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules see Chapter 7 Full Class Division 2 Compliance All ControlLogix digital I O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2 system certification This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed in an environment other than only a 100 hazard free Modules should not be pulled under power nor PORTANT should a powered RIB be removed in a Class I Division 2 environment ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 11 CE CSA UL FM Agency Approvals Any ControlLogix digital I O modules that have obtained CE CSA UL FM agency approval are marked as such Ultimately all digital modules will have these agency approvals and be marked accordingly Diagnostic Latch of Information Diagnostic Latching allows diagnostic I O modules to latch
149. dule is maintained If the connection between owner and module is broken the module stops multicasting data and connections to all Listening controllers are also broken Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 18 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Multiple Owners of Input Modules Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Initial Configuration Because Listening controllers lose their connections to modules when communications with the owner stop the ControlLogix system will allow you to define more than one owner for input modules IM PORTANT Only input modules can have multiple owners If multiple owners are connected to the same input module they must maintain identical configuration for that module In the example below Controller A and Controller B have both been configured to be the owner of the input module Multiple Owners with Identical Configuration Data Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX Controller A Input e Controller B Initial Configuration oO Duu T oo Input M odule Configuration Data Con A Con B XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX on oO _ een 41056 As soon as a controller receives its user program it will try to establish a connection
150. e 5 30V dc 60VA maximum for 30V dc inductive output 0 5A steady state 48V dc 24VA maximum for 48V dc inductive output 0 25A steady state 125V dc 31VA maximum for 125V dc inductive output 2A steady state 15A make 125V ac 2A steady state 15A make 240 V ac Maximum Off State 1 5mA per point Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to Leakage Current protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Output Delay Time Environmental Off to On 10ms maximum Conditions 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F On to Off 10ms maximum Operating Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Storage Temperature 5 to 95 noncondensing Relative Humidity Configurable Fault States Hold Last State ON or OFF Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum Per Point OFF is the default reference to the CST Configurable States in Hold Last State ON or OFF RTB Screw Torque 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Program Mode per Point OFF is the default Cage clamp Module Keying Software configurable Screwdriver Blade Width 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Backplane for RTB RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Conductors Agency Certification T 1 Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 1 when product or Up Listed Industrial Control Equipment 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum packaging is marked Certified Process Control Equipment Category 23 Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D
151. e 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 1 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade W idth for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked I Uy Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Gis Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 6 Module Specific Information 1756 1A8D NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example L2 can be connected to any terminal marked L2 0 2 This wiring example shows a single voltage source 3 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to other RTBs always connect the daisy chain as shown 4 Resistors are not necessary if Wire Off diagnostic is not used
152. e Module IFM P 2 1 2 Internal Module Operations 2 4 Index 3 J J umper Bar 5 5 Using with 1756 IA16 module 7 4 Using with the 1756 IB16 module 7 12 Using with the 1756 IH16 module 7 18 Using with the 1756 IM 16I module 7 20 Using with the 1756 0A161 module 7 30 Using with the 1756 0B16I module 7 42 Using with the 1756 OW 16 module 7 58 Using with the 1756 OX8I module 7 60 K Keying 5 2 Electronic 3 4 4 4 Mechanical keying 1 4 L Ladder Logic Creating new tag B 3 M essage configuration B 4 message instruction B 3 M essage instructions B 1 Message number of elements B 6 Message object attributes B 6 M essage object ID B 6 M essage object types B 6 M essage service codes B 6 Module services B 2 Performing the pulse test B 13 Resetting a fuse B 13 Resetting latched diagnostics B 13 Latched Diagnostics resetting with ladder logic B 13 Latching Diagnostic latching 3 17 4 11 Leakage Resistor Determining on 1756 IA8D module 7 6 Determining on 1756 IB16D module 7 10 LED Status Indicators 3 10 4 10 Input modules 8 1 Output modules 8 2 Listen Only Communications Formats Input modules 6 6 Output modules 6 8 Listen Only Connections P 2 2 17 Listen Only Rack Connection 2 7 Listen Only Rack Optimization 2 7 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Index 4 Local Chassis General I O module operation 2 2 Using input modules 2 10 Using output modules 2 14 Locking Tab 1 4 Logix5550 Controller P
153. e Times for Remote Output Data Transfer Best case time Worst case time Backplane Network RPI rate transfer times lt 1mS These Best and Worst Case scenarios indicate the IMPORTANT time required for output data to transfer from the owner controller to the module once the owner controller has produced it They do not take into account the user program time in the owner controller The receipt of new data is a function of the length of the user program and its asynchronous relationship with the RPI Listen Only Mode Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 17 Any controller in the system can listen to the data from any I O module e g input data echoed output data or echoed diagnostic information even if the controller does not own the module i e it does not have to hold the module s configuration data to listen to the module During the I O configuration process you can specify one of several Listen modes in the Communication Format field For more information on Communication Format see page 6 6 Choosing a Listen mode option allows the controller and module to establish communications without the controller sending any configuration data In this instance another controller owns the module being listened to IM PORTANT In the Listen Only mode controllers will continue to receive data multicast from the I O module as long as the connection between the owner and I O mo
154. e changed The module must be deleted and recreated Output M odule Formats The following are possible Communications Format choices for output modules As with input modules the number and type of choices varies depending on which output module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote chassis The following are possible Communications Format choices for output modules e output data owner controller sends the module only output data e CST timestamped fuse data output data owner controller sends the module only output data Module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse was either blown or reset e Full diagnostic output data owner controller sends the module only output data Module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics e Scheduled output data owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 8 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules e CST timestamped fuse data scheduled output data owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse was either blown or reset e Full diagnostics scheduled output data owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Module returns diagnostic data and a tim
155. e fault bits Table 4 A Unique Fault Bits for 1 0 Points Input Points Output Points Conditions Open wire Fuse blown Setting a Field power loss No load Fault Bit 1756 IA8D only Output verify Field power loss 1756 OA8D only Using these bits in tandem with data echo and manually performing a pulse test can help to further isolate the fault See Table 4 B for possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OA8D module Table 4 B 1756 OA8D Diagnostic Fault Table Possible Cause of Fault Ladder Commands the Output to be ON Ladder Commands Output to be OFF 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the Output is shorted to L2 output as OFF 2 Fuse Blown bit is set output as OFF 2 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as ON 2 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as OFF 2 No Load bit is set No Load or output is shorted to L1 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Table 4 B ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 13 1756 OA8D Diagnostic Fault Table Ladder Commands the Output to be ON Ladder Commands Output to be OFF Possible Cause of Fault 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as OFF No Load shows a Fault Field Power Loss shows a Fault Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the out
156. e filter Oms 1ms or 2ms 2ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms 6ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of state Software configurable Time stamp of inputs 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 23 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification Up Listed Industrial Control Equipment when product or packaging is marked Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223
157. e point that needs to be NOTE RSLogix5000 will not allow changed and type a valid new value you to enter invalid values for point by point features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 A 14 Using Software Configuration Tags Highlight Value Controller Tags User_Documentation controller Local 1 C AB 1756_ ocal 1 C ProgT oF aultEn Local 1 C FaultMode 2 0000_0000_0000_00 Decimal Binary BOOL DINT Local 1 C Faultalue 2 0000_0000_0000_00 Binary DINT Local 1 C ProgMode 2 0000_0000_0000_00 Binary DINT Local 1 C ProgValue xl2go000 ooo 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 0 0000 Piocalt 1 Highlight the value of the feature you want to change Note that this series of values is listed in descending order of point number M ake sure you have highlighted the point you want to change 2 Type in the valid new value Downloading New Configuration Data From the Tag Editor Pull down this menu and click here to download the new data Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 AB 1756_ Local 1 0 AB 1756_ Monitor Tags A Edit Tags fo RSLogix 5000 User_doc 1756 File Edit View Search Logic Comn damas Bl irine z o Forces Who Active ces Disable Select Recent Path Go Online Eoaam mode Bonide Test Mode
158. e when creating a module For example the 1756 IA16I module has four choices of Communications Formats Input Data CST Timestamped Input Data Listen Only Input Data Listen Only CST Timestamped Input Data If you choose CST Timestamped Input Data several more tags are created than if you choose Input Data Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 A 2 Using Software Configuration Tags The following screens show the difference between viewing change of state for a point on the 1756 IA16I module through the module s properties tabs and the Data Monitor in the Tag Editor il Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16D 2 1 Module Properties Change of state a J DE J ee sean t Change of state vii Both screens show the same feature on the module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Software Configuration Tags A 3 M odule Tag N ames and The set of tags associated with any module depends on the type of module De fi ni ti ons and the Communications Format chosen during configuration Standard Input M odule Tags Tables A 1 and A 2 list and define all tags that may be used for ControlLogix standard digital input modules Input modules have two types of tags e configuration e input data IM PORTANT The table below lists all possible standard input module tags In each application though the series of tags varies depen
159. ea asii Recommendations for Wiring Your RTB Consider the following guidelines when wiring your RTB e Begin wiring the RTB at the bottom terminals and move up e Use a tie to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB e The jumper bar part number is 97739201 Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales representative to order additional jumper bars if necessary e Order and use an extended depth housing Cat No 1756 TBE for applications that require heavy gauge wiring For more information see page 5 8 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 5 6 Installing the ControlLogix I O M odule Table 5 A lists the page number of the specific wiring diagram for each ControlLogix I O module Table 5 A Wiring Connections Catalog Number Page for Wiring RTB Connections 1756 1A16 7 2 20 pin 1756 1A161 7 4 36 pin 1756 IA8D 7 6 20 pin 1756 1B16 7 8 20 pin 1756 IB16D 7 10 36 pin 1756 1B161 7 12 36 pin 1756 1B32 7 14 36 pin 1756 1C16 7 16 20 pin 1756 1H161 7 18 36 pin 1756 IM16l 7 20 36 pin 1756 IN16 7 22 20 pin 1756 IV16 7 24 20 pin 1756 IV32 7 26 36 pin 1756 0A16 7 28 20 pin 1756 OA161 7 30 36 pin 1756 OA8 7 32 20 pin 1756 OA8D 7 34 20 pin 1756 OA8E 7 36 20 pin 1756 OB16D 7 38 36 pin 1756 0B16E 7 40 20 pin 1756 0B161 7 42 36 pin 1756 0B32 7 44 36 pin 1756 0B8 7 46 20 pin 1756 OB8EI 7 48 36 pin 1756 0C8 7 50 36 pi
160. ect New Module Cura aredi 2 Choose a 1756 CNB or 1756 CNBR module and configure it For more information on the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules see the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Installation Instructions publication 1756 5 32 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 20 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules 1 Select the local communications module 2 Click on the right mouse button and select New Module 3 Configure a communications module for the remote chassis IMPORTANT Be aware of the two Communications Format choices available for 1756 CNB modules For more informatio on the differences between Rack Optimization and Listen Only Rack Optimization see chapter 2 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Mints Ponperior Lia phi 170E A Ip TV PSECHS D 1755 Coria ei Bede Vando E T Pant Londoh ooo Et z Corre Forest rack Cranston a liia Dak Hk aie Peia eg de Fisher r ene _ net j e For more information on the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules see the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Installation Instructions publication 1756 5 32 Now you can configure the remote I O modules by adding them to the remote communications module Follow the same procedures as you do for configuring local I O modules as detailed earlier in this chapter Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 21 Input Online Services Diagnostic input
161. ed time frame elapses the module will multicast data This is also called a cyclic update Change of State COS This parameter instructs the module to transfer data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON The module COS feature defaults to both ON to OFF IMPORTANT and OFF to ON enabled COS selection occurs on a per point basis but all module data is multicast when any point enabled for COS changes state COS is more efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs THITte You must specify an RPI regardless of whether you enable COS If a change does not occur within the RPI timeframe the module will still multicast data at the rate specified by the RPI COS multicast RPI multicast Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 250 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 11 For example if an input is changing state consistently every 2 seconds and the RPI is set at 750mS the data transfer will look like this l 1 1 y I 1 I I 1 1 I 1 I ii 1 1 I 1 I I I 1 I l I I 1 1 l l j I i 1 I l I i 1 l f l I i 1 l I I I I 1 1 l 500 750 1250 1500 1750 2250 2500 2750 3250 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 Sec 41381 Because the RPI and COS functions are asynchronous to the program scan itis possible for an input to change state during program scan execution The point must be buffered to prevent this Copy the input data from your input tags to another structure a
162. egory information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 56 Module Specific Information 1756 OV16E NOTES 1 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown This wiring example shows a single voltage source If Separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage If Separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage N w A Display Simplified schematic Optoisolation Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description ControlBus Interface 42673 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 output data Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Pr
163. em level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 10 Module Specific Information 1756 1B 16D Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description NOTES 1 Allterminals with the same name Daisy chain to Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF 9ms Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4 11 Open Wire Detection Enabled 4 15 Diagnostic Change of State for Enabled 4 25 Output Modules Communications Format Full diagnostics input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module are connected together on the other RTBs GND 0 2 116 IN 0 J module For example DC COM can 3 E be connected to any terminal ins i l E 15kQ 1 4W Group 0 marked GND 0 GND 0 Nae i IN 3 5 resistor 2 Do not physically connect more q than two
164. er defined WHO data structure and a series of Copy instructions following the Message instruction in the screen capture below to make the module identification information more easily understood The user defined data structure appears below Coated Tage whi The user defined WHO data structure displays module identification information in an easily understood format For example major revision displays that the module s major revision is 2 See MC re 3tak neg Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Rung 0 constantly polls the module for WHO status To conserve bandwidth only poll for status whe n necessary Rung lextracts the product type and catalog code Rung 2 extracts th and minor revisions Rung 3 extracts th status information Rung 4 extracts th serial number Rung 5 extracts th text string and the string in bytes e module s major e module s e vendor ID and e module s ASCII length of the text Using Ladder Logic B 15 You do not have to create the user defined data structure If you choose not to create this structure you can use the Ascii string and String length to retrieve and understand module identification through some interface excluding RSLogix 5000 software The screen below shows the example WHO ladder logic application eal iy a ee j i dmh ri ae H oe PY a ta a xl Mantseiren al Use Table 4 to understand the
165. ers to ControlLogix output modules see Appendix D For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company products to ControlLogix output modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG 2 1 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Modules ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 3 The following features are common to all ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP All ControlLogix I O diagnostic modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature allows greater availability of the overall control system because while the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process Module Fault Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module s LED fault indicator and RSLogix 5000 will graphically display this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature allows you to determine how your module has been affected and what action should be taken to resume normal operation Fully Softw are Configurable The RSLogix 5000 software uses a custom easily understood interface to write configuration All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration portion of the software You can also use the
166. ertification when product or packaging is marked UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 40 Module Specific Information 1756 OB 16E NOTES 1 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown This wiring example shows a single voltage source If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage N w Simplified schematic Display Optoisolation th male a Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 output data Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11
167. es are common to all ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Configurable Point Level Output Fault States Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states either ON OFF or Last State in case of a communications failure or program mode IM PORTANT Whenever you inhibit a diagnostic output module it enters the program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs tum off during program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs will turn off Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 18 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Output Data Echo During normal operation when a processor sends an output command out to the ControlLogix system the diagnostic output module that is targeted for that command will return the commanded state of the output to the system to verify the module received the command and will try to execute it Other devices can use this broadcast signal via a listen only connection to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the owner controller This feature cannot relay to the system that the field side device connected to the output module has executed the command If your application requires a more detailed response than only acknowledging the receipt of a co
168. es in a networked chassis running RSNetWorx is not necessary However anytime a controller references an I O module in a networked chassis you must run RSNetWorx to configure ControlNet Follow these guidelines when configuring I O modules 1 Configure all I O modules for a given controller using RSLogix 5000 and download that information to the controller 2 If the I O configuration data references a module in a remote chassis run RSNetWorx IM PORTANT RSNetWorx must be run whenever a new module is added to a networked chassis When a module is permanently removed from a remote chassis we recommend that Networx be run to optimize the allocation of network bandwidth Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 4 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System Internal Module Operations Signal propogation delays exist with ControlLogix I O modules that a Signal applied at the RTB Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 must be accounted for when operating them Some of these delays are user selectable and some are inherent to the module hardware For example there is a small delay typically less than 1mS between when a signal is applied at the RTB of a ControlLogix input module and when a signal is sent to the system over the ControlBus This typical time reflects a filter time choice of 0mS for a DC input This section offers a graphical explanation of the time limitations with ControlLogix I O m
169. essage Instructions Table B 3 Source and Destination Field Tags Source Tag Description Enable_32_Points Parameter used to determine which points are enabled DINT for the service e g If bit 0 1 for Reset Fuse then point 0 has its electronic fuse reset Results 32 Points Pass 0 Fail 1 result for the service i e If bit 0 1 for DINT the results of the Reset Fuse then the Reset Fuse failed for point 0 Communications Pop Up Screen This pop up screen provides information on the path of the message instruction For example the slot number of a 1756 OA8D module distinguishes exactly which module a message is designated for Use the Browse button to see a list of the I O IMFORTANT modules in the system You choose a path when you choose a module from the list You must name an I O module during initial module configuration to choose a path for your message instruction Miscinge Cordiged aimee Gled Chil Aei Fess Conkgusaton Coorercetor Bethe Fro co Use this Browse PALOMAR button to see a PE EA Bere ee corent A rae k below E Cache Coneectorn JEn J Erei sag AS J Doe Taree Levert 1 2 lme F Tesu Extender Erra Lode o Cancel pay Hak Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 B 10 Using Ladder Logic Using Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs This example demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for digital I O The CST can be utilized to synchr
170. estamp of diagnostics e Rack optimization owner controller sends all digital output words to the remote chassis as a single rack image These additional Communications Format choices are used by controllers that want to listen to an output module but not own it The choices have the same definition as those above e Listen only output data e Listen only CST timestamped fuse data output data e Listen only full diagnostics output data e Listen only rack optimization For example the screen below shows the choices available when you are configuring a 1756 OA8 module in a local chassis 4 Com farat 0 as Divs IM PORTANT Once the module is created the communications format cannot be changed The module must be deleted and recreated Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 9 The following table lists the Communications Formats available on each module Table 6 A Communications Formats Module 1756 1A16 IA16I IM16l 1B16l 1B16 IB32 IC16 IH16l IN16 IV16 Available Communications Formats Input data CST timestamped input data Rack optimization Listen only input data Listen only CST timestamped input data Listen only rack optimization 1756 IA8D IB16D Full diagnostics input data Listen only full diagnostics input data 1756 0A16 OA8E OB16E OB8El OV16E CST timestamped fuse data output
171. evision of 3 1 the module works at the 2 7 level despite having been previously upgraded If possible we suggest you make sure configuration is updated to match the revision levels of all I O modules Failure to do so may not prevent the application from working but may defeat the purpose of upgrading your modules revision levels Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 6 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Disable Keying The inserted module attempts to accept a connection to the controller regardless of its type Be extremely cautious when using the disable ATTENTION keying option if used incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss If keying is disabled a controller makes a connection with most modules of the same type as that used in the slot configuration For example if a slot is configured for a 1756 IA16I standard input module and a 1756 IB16 standard input module is inserted into the slot the controller established a connection because keying is disabled A controller will not establish a connection if any of the following conditions exist even if keying is disabled e The slot is configured for one module type e g input module and a module of another type e g output module is inserted in the slot e The module inserted into the slot cannot accept some portion o
172. f the configuration For example if a standard input module is inserted into a slot configured for a diagnostic input module the controller cannot make a connection because the module cannot accept process the diagnostic configuration ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 7 Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs Controllers generate a 64 bit Coordinated System Time CST for their respective chassis The CST is a chassis specific time that is not synchronized with or in any way connected to the time generated over ControlNet to establish a NUT as described in Chapter 2 You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and timestamp input data with a relative time reference i e the value of the CST of when that input data changes state Because only one CST value is returned to the IMPORTANT a controller when any input point changes state it is recommended that you use timestamping on only one input point per module Timestamping for a Sequence of Events The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a particular input module point by timestamping the input data To determine a sequence of events you must e Set the input module s communications format to CST Timestamped Input Data e Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence will occur Disable COS for all other points on the module TIP If you decide to configure multi
173. fo in manual What information is missing C example C guideline feature accessibility C explanation C other C info not in manual L Clarity What is unclear C Sequence What is not in the right order L Other Comments Use back for more comments Your Name Location Phone Return to M arketing Communications Allen Bradley 1 Allen Bradley Drive Mayfield Hts OH 44124 6118Phone 440 646 3176 FAX 440 646 4320 Publication ICCG 5 21 August 1995 PN 955107 82 PLEASE FASTEN HERE DO NOT STAPLE Other Comments PLEASE FOLD HERE NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE Allen Bradley aA a DODGE 2 Rockwell Automation 1 ALLEN BRADLEY DR MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124 9705 1756 UM 058C EN P March Reach us now at www rockwellautomation com Wherever you need us Rockwell Automation brings together leading brands in industrial automation including Allen Bradley controls Reliance Electric power transmission products Dodge mechanical power transmission components and Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation s unique flexible approach to helping customers achieve a competitive advantage is supported by thousands of authorized partners distributors and system integrat
174. g Electrostatic This module is sensitive to electrostatic discharge Discharge Electrostatic discharge can damage ATTENTION integrated circuits or semiconductors if you touch backplane connector pins Follow these guidelines when you handle the module e Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential e Wear an approved wrist strap grounding device e Do not touch the backplane connector or connector pins e Do not touch circuit components inside the module e If available use a static safe work station e When not in use keep the module in its Static shield box Removal and Insertion These modules are designed to be installed or removed while chassis Under Power power is applied ATTENTION When you insert or remove a module while backplane power is applied an electrical arc may occur An electrical arc can cause personal injury or property damage by e sending an erroneous signal to your system s field devices causing unintended machine motion or loss of process control e causing an explosion in a hazardous environment Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connectors Wom contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about J What s Next e what ControlLogix digital I O modules are e types of ControlLogix digital I O modules Move on to Chapter 2 Digital I O Opera
175. gram Mode E edulis Fogat Local Pe ee i Gerace Connector Merkie ii Conkpasice Diagreebct Backplane 1 Update the RPI rate a D irha ok D Hag iat r Cordas li ornar ak tle r fin Viie Biha Fin Sealur Aung oe Cuenca Appl Hay 2 Click here to download Click here to download the new data and close the new data and keep the screen the screen open Before the RPI rate is updated online RSLogix 5000 will verify your desired change Click here to continue with the RPI change The RPI has been changed and the new configuration data has been downloaded to the controller After making changes to your module s configuration in Program Mode it is recommended that you change the module back to Run Mode Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 19 Configuring 1 0 Modules in ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules 1756 CNB or 1756 CNBR a Remote Chassis are required to communicate with I O modules in a remote chassis You must configure the communications module in the local chassis and the remote chassis before adding new I O modules to the program 1 Configure a communications module for the local chassis This module handles communications between the controller chassis and the remote chassis Cirk ghi Full Hiha Pomme H arie j Taka em hT ih 1 Select I O Configuration 2 Click on the right mouse button to display the menu 3 Sel
176. hanges state This helps to reduce the Worst Case time Table 2 B summarizes the Best Case and Worst Case scenarios from the time an input changes state to the time the owner controller will receive the data Table 2 B Best and Worst Case Scenarios For Remote Input Data Transfer Best case scenario Worst case scenario COS disabled Backplane Network Twice the RPI transfer times lt 1mS COS enabled Backplane Network Slightly less than the RPI transfer times lt 1mS When selecting values for the remotely located module s RPI system throughput is optimized when its RPI value is a power of 2 times the current NUT running on ControlNet For example Table 2 C shows recommended RPI values for a system using a NUT of 5mS Table 2 C Recommended RPI Values for System Using NUT of 5mS NUT 5mS x20 x2 x22 x23 x x28 x x2 Optimal RPI 5mS 10mS 20mS 40mS 80mS 160mS 320mS 640mS Values mS Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 14 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System Output M odule Operation Output Modules in a Local Chassis Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 An owner controller sends output data to an output module when either one of two things occur e at the end of every one of its program scans local chassis only and or e at the rate specified in the module s RPI When an output module physically reside
177. hen ut R D ors wou another RTB Jumper ua E IGD ours oon 1 ASO HSS our This wiring example shows L1 1 E ie L2 1 D Surge Current Chart Continuous 30 C Continuous 60 C 43ms Time 40848 M 40185 M LED indicator gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST 01234567 0 T01234567 DIAGNOSTIC 20935 M Module Specific Information 7 35 1756 OA8D Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common M odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 175mA 5 1V dc amp 250mA 24V dc Total backplane power 6 89W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 5 3W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 18 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 74 132V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Point Per Module 1A max 30 C amp 0 5A max 60 C Linear derating 8A max 30 C amp 4A max 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 8A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 30 C 5A for 43ms each repeatable every 1s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2 5V peak 0 5A amp 3V peak 1A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maxi
178. ied Class Division 2 Group A B C D gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D E M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 54 M odule Specific Information 1756 ON8 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module NOTES 1 All terminals with the Daisy chain to _______f same name are connected other RTBs DN NU together on the module L1 0 j H For examp
179. iguration data 41058 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 4 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Creating a New Module After you have started RSLogix 5000 and created a controller you must create a new module The wizard allows you to create a new module and write configuration You can use default configuration or write specific configuration for your application MEA You must be offline when you create a new module If you are not offline use this pull down menu to go offline Cirkai Full Hiekan Piram ip H aie Lorerik Fagon Tardi 1 Select 1 0 Configuration 3 9 Dais Tapar 2 Click on the right mouse button to display the menu 3 Select New Module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 5 A screen appears with a list of possible new modules for your application Select Model Type Type Mae Fevre E fi I Make sure the T M ajor Revision 1FSEIT Bi 6 Channa limited Tiree nyumber matches 11 Conai aya MEN pik 175E r da S58 peek the label on the 1FSE LEE CortaLogs SSipeceser side of your module VRE Liai Are Enia a 7S 4001UL0 eee 17 Mince 18 Pond 265 A apu 1 Ford TBS I hied Dui 1 Select a module 3 Pani PPri JC D eegrmorrtee Dipa TELE Pier AEN A Ekaini Fiad higar 1756 01 Bt TE Poand Toe DC Dieyen Calpe at xj Sho indor far F ome F peun oaa Cancel ta
180. ill require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 8 Module Specific Information 1756 1B 16 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF lms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module IN 1 ee iG N 0 6 4 IN 3 ee JEB IN 2 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name Group 0 IN 5 i EDI IN 4 Group 0 are connected together on the D yee module For example DC COM Daisy IN 7 ID IED N 6 can be connected to either chain to terminal marked GND 0 other RTBs GND 0 ie IES GND 0 2 Do not physically connect more m ji ji 1 than two wires to
181. illiseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached All other channels with a NUT of that group will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU Bridge etc 4 A fuse is provided on each common of this module for a total of 2 fuses The fuses are designed to protect the module from s hort circuit conditions The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an overload on an output channel it is likely that the fuse will not blow and the output device associated with that channel will be damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuses should be externally installed 5 Ifa short circuit condition occurs on any channel within this module s group the entire group is turned off 6 The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power sources 7 The recommended fuse for this module has been sized 0 provide short circuit protection for w a short circuit on an output channel it is likely should be replaced or a spare output c overload on an output channel it is likely that t annel used for hat the transistor or relay associated with tha he fuse will not blow and the transistor or rela iring only to external loads Int e event of channel will be damaged and t damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuse should be i match the individual load ch
182. imum Maximum Off State Voltage 5V Maximum Off State Current 2 75mA Maximum Input 2 5kQ 60Hz Impedance 30V ac Input Delay Time Off to on Hardware delay On to off Hardware delay Programmable filter Oms 1ms or 2ms 10ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter 9ms or 18ms 10ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of state Time stamp of inputs Software configurable 200s Max Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User Selectable 200ys minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade W idth for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum a Ai Op Listed Industrial Control Equipment marked Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group
183. in remote chassis 2 3 Transferring data to networked I O modules and establishing a NUT 2 2 Using with RSLogix 5000 2 2 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Index 6 S Scheduled Output Data Communications Format 6 7 Scheduled Outputs 3 7 4 7 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 7 Usage tips 3 8 4 8 Used with timestamping 3 8 4 8 Used with timestamping in ladder logic B 10 Softw are Configuration Tags A 1 Specifications 1756 IA16 module 7 3 1756 IA16 module 7 5 1756 IA8D module 7 7 1756 IB16 module 7 9 1756 IB16D module 7 11 1756 IB161 module 7 13 1756 IB32 module 7 15 7 27 1756 IC16 module 7 17 1756 IH16 module 7 19 1756 IM 16 module 7 21 1756 IN16 module 7 23 1756 IV16 module 7 25 1756 0A16 module 7 29 1756 0A16I module 7 31 1756 0A8 module 7 33 1756 OA8D module 7 35 1756 OA8E module 7 37 1756 OB16D module 7 39 1756 OB16E module 7 41 7 57 1756 0B16 module 7 43 1756 0B32 module 7 45 1756 OB8 module 7 47 1756 OB8El module 7 49 1756 0C8 module 7 51 1756 OH8I module 7 53 1756 ON8 module 7 55 1756 OV16E module 7 57 1756 OW 16I module 7 59 1756 OX8I module 7 61 Spring Clamp RTB 5 5 Standard Depth Housing 5 8 Status Indicators 1 4 Input modules 8 2 Output modules 8 3 Status Reporting Diagnostic input modules 4 25 Diagnostic output modules 4 27 Standard input modules 3 18 Standard output modules 3 19 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 System Time Adjusting the RPI 6 10 Choosing a timestamped in
184. ing The 1756 OA16I A output point current 1 67A can drive the motor starter 0 375A 50 C Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 D 4 Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital I O M odules 8 Confirm the 1756 OA16I A total module current can drive 12 size 3 motor starters 50 C Motor starter steady state current X 11 motor starters 375 X 12 4 5A 50 C The output total module current can drive 5A 033ma X 10 C 5A 0 33A 4 67A 50 C Above 30 C total output current derates to 033mA C Module derating The 1756 OA16I A total output current 4 67A can drive the 12 motor starters 4 5A 50 C Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Numerics 1756 1A16 M odule specific information 7 2 1756 1A 161 M odule specific information 7 4 1756 IA8D M odule specific information 7 6 1756 1B 16 M odule specific information 7 8 1756 1B 16D M odule specific information 7 10 1756 1B 161 M odule specific information 7 12 1756 1B 32 M odule specific information 7 14 1756 1C16 M odule specific information 7 16 1756 1H161 M odule specific information 7 18 1756 1M 16l M odule specific information 7 20 1756 IN 16 M odule specific information 7 22 1756 1V16 M odule specific information 7 24 1756 1V32 M odule specific information 7 26 1756 0A16 M odule specific information 7 28 1756 0A 161 M odule specific information 7 30 1756 OA8 M odule specific information 7 32 1756 OA8D
185. ing 1 6 Exact Match Electronic keying 3 4 4 4 Extended Depth Housing Cabinet size considerations 5 9 Using 5 8 5 9 F Fault Reporting Determining fault type with RSLogix 5000 8 5 Diagnostic input modules 4 25 Diagnostic modules 4 3 4 12 Diagnostic output modules 4 17 4 27 Standard input modules 3 18 Standard modules 3 3 Standard output modules 3 19 Field Power Loss Detection 1756 IA8D module 4 16 1756 OA8E module 3 17 Field Power Loss Word Diagnostic input modules 4 25 4 26 Diagnostic output modules 4 27 4 28 Standard output modules 3 19 3 20 Filter Times Software configurable 3 11 4 14 FM Certification 1 1 3 11 4 11 Full Diagnostic Output Data Communications Format 6 7 Full Diagnostic Input Data Communications Format 6 6 Full Diagnostics Scheduled Output Data Communications Format 6 8 Fuse Blown Word Diagnostic output modules 4 27 4 28 Standard output modules 3 19 3 20 Fusing Diagnostic output modules 4 20 4 24 Nondiagnostic output modules 3 14 Recommended fuses for diagnostic output modules 4 20 Recommended fuses for standard output modules 3 15 Resetting a fuse in ladder logic B 13 Resetting electronic fuse in RSLogix 5000 6 22 H Housing Choosing the extended depth housing 5 8 Inhibit Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 10 Preventing communication P 2 Input M odule Filters Configuring in RSLogix 5000 3 11 4 14 6 12 6 14 Input Online Services 6 21 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 5 1 Interfac
186. inimum leakage current to function properly A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input device See each module s specifications listed in Chapter 6 for more details The resulting current is then expected to exist when the input is open When an Open Wire condition is detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point fault This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A If this feature is enabled for points that are not in IMPORTANT f use you will receive faults for those points during operation For an example of how to enable the Open Wire detection diagnostic see page 6 15 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 16 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Field Power Loss Detection Field Power Loss is only found on the 1756 IA8D module When field power to the module is lost a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A If this feature is enabled for points that are not in IMPORTANT f use you will receive faults for
187. inuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification Uy i Listed Industrial Control Equipment when product or packaging is marked Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 38 Module Specific Information 1756 OB 16D Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default va
188. ion None If the module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 23 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked Oy Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class I Division 2 Group A B C D 3 M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication
189. ion 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Table of Contents vi Power Supply Sizing Chart Driving M otor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Index Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Performing a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and AWS eaae Siecle Gag baa hg MA gum ee i B 14 Using Tags in Ladder Logic sass ss deedsaee das B 16 Appendix C Appendix D Determining the Maximum Number of Motor Starters D 2 Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules What This Cha pter Contains This chapter describes the ControlLogix digital modules and what you must know and do before you begin to use them What are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules For information about What are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules See page 1 1 Using an I O Module in the ControlLogix System 1 2 Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 2 Features of the ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 4 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge 1 6 Removal and Insertion Under Power 1 6 Chapter Summary and W hat s Next 1 6 ControlLogix digital I O modules are input output modules that provide ON OFF detection and actuation Using the producer consumer network model they can produce information when needed while providing additional system functions The following is a list of the features available on ControlLogix digital I O modules that allow greater system applicability e Re
190. ists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4 11 No Load Detection Enabled 4 21 Field Side Output Verification Enabled 4 22 Pulse Test Performed at user s request 4 22 Field Power Loss Detection Enabled 4 24 Communications Format CST timestamped fuse 6 6 data output data Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Program Mode Disabled 6 11 Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module a single voltage source are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Diagnostic Control Block with Opto amp Transformer Isolation L1 8A ControlBus VAC T Interface Y ii A Short GATE ne ee 5A a en Ki _Verify N AY OUT 1A 0 Load 500mA L2 FO 0 Display Loss of Field Pow er 41118 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Surge 30 C Surge 60 C ee tuse FEST wo other RTBs L1 0 i ie OUT 0 All terminals with the same L1 0 ie ice OUT 1 ter re outa L1 0 I ice OUT 2 cmt ye u IED HGS ours marked L1 0 a Do eter L1 1 ID D OUT 4 single RTB terminai W
191. isy chain to DC 5 E 22 21 OUT 5 other RTBS e RTN OUT 5 ES u 23 OUT 5 Daisy chain DC 6 E 26 25 OUT 6 to other RTBs RTN OUT 6 E 28 27 OUT 6 EE DC 7 E 30 29 OUT 7 N OUT 7 E 32 31 OUT 7 J umper Not used 34 33 Not used wires Not used 36 35 Not used Daisy chain to H other RTBs Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart DC 0 Sirge D 5V n gt OUT 0 ele Continuous a po A RTN 2A 60 C Tea OUT 0 D ControlBus Interface Display 0 H 30347 M Time 10ms 40849 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 40169 M LED indicator gt DC OUTPUT 3 ST 01234567 go K 40466 M Module Specific Information 7 53 1756 OH8I Specifications Number of Outputs 8 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 210mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 1 11W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 3 3W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 11 25 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 90 146V dc Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 1s 60 C Minimum Load Current 2mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2V dc 2A Maximum Off State Leakage Current
192. ix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1756 5 67 PB72 1756 PA75 ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1756 5 78 PB75 e ordered and received an RTB or IFM and its components for your application METIA RTBs and IFMs are not included with your module purchase Table 1 B Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Catalog Description RTB Number 1756 IA16 79 132V ac 16 pt input module 20 pin 1756 1A16 79 132V ac 16 pt isolated input module 36 pin 1756 IA8D 79 132V ac 8pt diagnostic input module 20 pin 1756 IB16 10 31V dc 16 pt input module 20 pin 1756 IB16D 10 30V dc diagnostic input module 36 pin 1756 IB16l 10 30V dc 16 pt isolated input module 36 pin 1756 1B32 10 31V dc 32 pt input module 36 pin 1756 IC16 30 60V dc 16 pt input module 20 pin 1756 IH16 90 146V dc 16 pt isolated input module 36 pin 1756 IM 161 159 265V ac 16 pt isolated input module 36 pin 1756 IN 16 10 30V ac 16 pt input module 20 pin 1756 IV16 10 31V dc 16 pt sourcing current input module 20 pin 1756 IV32 10 31V dc 32 pt sourcing current input module 36 pin What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 3 Table 1 B Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Catalog Description RTB Number 1756 0A16 74 265V ac 16 pt output module 20 pi 1756 0A 16 74 265V ac 16 pt isolated output module 36 pi 1756 0A8 7
193. k eo kee ESL aOR 4 22 Point Level Electronic Fusing 005 4 24 Field Power Loss Detection 000 000 4 24 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules 4 25 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers 0h pbs PE ee dee ue ol ke bho eee 4 25 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and COMMOUET 6554 4 p40 5A FAS beh ORS RS RR eee 4 27 Chapter Summary and What s Next 05 4 29 Chapter 5 What This Chapter Contains 000 ecu eeee 5 1 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 5 1 Keying the Removable Terminal Block 5 2 Connecting Wiring 1 cee cee ene 5 4 Assembling Removable Terminal Block and the Housing 5 7 Choosing the Extended Depth Housing 5 8 Installing the Removable Terminal Block 5 10 Removing the Removable Terminal Block 5 12 Removing the Module from the Chassis 5 13 Chapter Summary and What s Next 005 5 14 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Table of Contents iv Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Module Specific Information Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Chapter 6 What This Chapter Contains 0 000 ce eeee 6 1 Configuring Your I O Module ass 24 46 espe hades Ges 6 2 RSLogix 5000 Configuration Software 6 2 Overview of the Configuration Process 6 2
194. le 2 Click here The new module creation wizard appears Re Loca iE DAA 1 1 Tya ATELA Pani PAN AE Dupa Tireki Aimi ri Paeit Local 1 Enter an optional name pim rre sh 3 2 Enter an optional description gt Imes 3 Choose a imp Opi tes 5 Choose an Electronic Communications Format fee Pa Elector Emerg Copia me Keying method A A detailed explanation detailed explanation of of this field is provided this field is provided on the page 6 9 Coca Mers LF ise O 4 M ake sure the If you are altering the If you are using Minor Revision default configuration default configuration numbermatchesthe click here click here and you are label on the side of Go to page 6 10 finished configuring your module your module Go to page 6 10 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 6 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Communications Format The communications format determines what type of configuration options are made available what type of data is transferred between the module and its owner controller and what tags are generated when configuration is complete This feature also defines the connection between the controller writing the configuration and the module itself The number and type of choices varies depending on which input module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote chassis TIP When you select a Listen only Communications Format only the
195. le L1 can be eo connected to any terminal Group 0 L1 0 j H marked L1 1 Keo 2 Do not physically connect J umper gt L1 0 i i more than two wires to a wire tT single RTB terminal Ene When you daisy chain NaN Ih from a group to another L1 1 I ID RTB always connect the L1 1 I N daisy chain as shown 3 This wiring example L1 1 shows a single voltage T 1 B source L1 1 ie i 4 If separate power sources CE are used do not exceed L1 1 ES ie the specified isolation voltage CN Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart 5V L1 0 i EES c 2 pe L a l Y ai clay Control Bus Interface 2A lt Display 5 Time ms 41161 M 40852 M OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 Not used OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Not used 40184 M LED indicator gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST 01234567 9 K 20978 M Module Specific Information 7 55 1756 ON8 Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common M odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 200mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 1 07 Maximum Power Dissipation M od 5 1W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30V ac current gt 50ma 47 63Hz 16 30V ac current lt 50ma 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Point Per Module 2A max 60 C 5A max 30 C 4A max
196. le Some of those parameters may also be changed through ladder logic In ladder logic you can use Message instructions to send occasional services to any ControlLogix I O module Message instructions send an explicit service to the module causing specific behavior to occur for example unlatching a high alarm Message instructions maintain the following characteristics e messages use unscheduled portions of system communications bandwidth e one service is performed per instruction e performing module services does not impede module functionality such as sampling inputs or applying new outputs Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 B 2 Using Ladder Logic Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Processing Real Time Control and Module Services Services sent via message instructions are not as time critical as the module behavior defined during configuration and maintained by a real time connection Therefore the module processes messaging services only after the needs of the I O connection have been met For example you may want to unlatch all process alarms on the module but real time control of your process is still occurring using the input value from that same channel Because the input value is critical to your application the module prioritizes the sampling of inputs ahead of the unlatch service request This prioritization allows input channels to be sampled at the same frequency and the process alarms to
197. ler behaves as if the I O module does not exist at all Interface module IFM A module that uses prewired cable to connect wiring to an I O module Listen only connection An I O connection where another controller owns provides the configuration and data for the module Table Preface B Related Terms Major revision Preface 3 A module revision that is updated any time there is a functional change to the module Minor revision A module revision that is updated any time there is a change to the module that does not affect its function or interface Multicast Data transmissions which reach a specific group of one or more destinations Multiple owners A configuration set up where multiple owner controllers use exactly the same configuration information to simultaneously own an input module Network update time NUT The smallest repetitive time interval in which the data can be sent on a ControlNet network The NUT ranges from 2ms to 100ms Owner controller The controller that creates and stores the primary configuration and communication connection to a module Program Mode Controller program is not executing Inputs are still actively producing data Outputs are not actively controlled and go to their configured program mode Rack connection An I O connection where the 1756 CNB module collects digital O words into a rack image to conserve ControlNet connections and band
198. lified schematic LED indicator 5V DC INPUT S 01234567 8 sgg 1111110 0 111 A ST 7 8 2 6 GND 0 F l K EN il 22 ST 45 I He SN OPP ON ON N WON EN Ww CWNN e ew wN UW ControlBus Display Interface 30183 M 30082 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 15 1756 1B 32 Specifications Number of Inputs 32 16 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 150mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 81W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 4 5W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 16 37 BTU hr 60 C On State Voltage Range 10 31 2V dc Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc ON State Current 10V dc 2 mA 31 2V dc 5 5mA Maximum Off State Voltage 5V dc M aximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 31 2V dc 5 67kQ Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter Oms 1ms or 2ms 1ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms 2ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of state Software configurable Time stamp on inputs 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100s minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Group to g
199. lowing table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF lms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module IN1 eb 2 6 N0 IN 3 Ayla 3 a IN 2 o IN 5 Tie 5 IIN 4 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same IN 7 DI B IN 6 name are connected Group 0 IN 9 Ao 9 o IN 8 Group 0 together on the module For ie Dye up Hee example DC COM can be ga O connected to either terminal re N N 15 Es 35 o IN 14 marked GND 1 rere GND 0 Fens ep GND 0 2 Do not physically connect IN 17 i2 19 IN 16 more than two wires toa IN 19 iz 21 EDL IN single RTB terminal When IN 21 4 23 you daisy chain to other J umper IN 23 E 25 RTBs always connect the wire Group1 N 25 28 27 daisy chain as shown IN 27 Jj 30 29 3 This wiring example shows IN 29 1132 31 a single voltage source IN 31 JD 34 33 4 GND 1 36 35 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage 40172 M Simp
200. lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 2 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category info 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 rmation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 60 Module Specific Information 1756 OX8l Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the L1 0 L1 0 2 1 JOUT 0 N C M o L2 0 odule For example L1 0 can be O 11L 0 De 3 GDL jOUT ONO N connected to either terminal Isolated L1 1 Je s g OUT 1 N C arked L
201. lue and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4 11 No Load Detection Enabled 4 21 Field Side Output Verification Enabled 4 22 Pulse Test Performed at user s request 4 22 Communications Format CST timestamped fuse 6 6 data output data Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Program Mode Disabled 6 11 Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module Daisy chain EF apeo aslo ale OUT 0 to other RTBs DC 0 Fae og OUT 1 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same DC 0 Ta gt OUT 2 name are connected DC 0 ome OUT 3 together on the module For DC 0 D Pep OUT 4 example DC COM can be Group0 DC 0 Hae i OUT 5 Group 0 connected to either l l DC 0 g i OUT 6 terminal marked GND 1 est ee _GND 0 a BE OUT 7 2 Do not physically connect sea DC 1 Te VENT OUT 8 more than two wires to a DC 1 aie a nig OUT 9 single RTB terminal W hen DC 1 ey 2g OUT 10 you daisy chain from a jumper DC 1 He 3 OUT 11 group to another RTB ies DC 1 e OUT 12 always connect the daisy Group 1 DC 1 28 27 OUT 13 Groupi chain as shown P DC 1 H 30 29 OUT 14 P
202. m for use in the ControlLogix system For information about See page Configuring Your I O Module 6 2 Overview of the Configuration Process 6 2 Creating a New Module 6 4 Using the Default Configuration 6 10 Altering the Default Configuration 6 10 Configuring a Standard Input M odule 6 12 Configuring a Standard Output M odule 6 13 Configuring a Diagnostic Input M odule 6 14 Configuring a Diagnostic Output M odule 6 15 Editing Configuration 6 16 Reconfiguring M odule Parameters in 6 17 Remote Run M ode Reconfiguring Module Parameters in 6 18 Program M ode Configuring 1 0 Modules in a Remote 6 19 Chassis Input Online Services 6 21 Output Online Services 6 22 Viewing and Changing M odule Tags 6 23 Chapter Summary and W hat s Next 6 24 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 2 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configuring Your I 0 Module Overview of the Configuration Process Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 You must configure your module upon installation The module will not work until it has been configured THI ha This chapter focuses on configuring I O modules in a local chassis To configure I O modules in a remote chassis you must follow all the detailed procedures with two additional steps An explanation of the additional steps is listed at the end of this chapter RSLogix 5000 Configuration Software Use RSLogix 5000 s
203. ment when product or packaging is marked Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D E M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 46 Module Specific Information 1756 0B8 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module Daisy chain to __ c qi4 T A NOTES 1 All terminals with th ee ji i i L All terminals with the same DC 0 TH H T 1 name are connected on the i D ad module F
204. mmand see the Field Side Output Verification feature defined later in this chapter M onitor Fault Bits The Output Data Echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is a problem with the module the commanded state and the Output Data Echo may not match You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions If a fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data echo may not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the Output Data Echo check your diagnostic output module for the following conditions e Communications fault e Connection inhibited e Blown fuse Module will not turn ON output if overload short circuit is detected e Loss of field power 1756 OA8D and 1756 OA8E only Module will not tum ON output if no AC power is detected ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 19 Field Wiring Options As with diagnostic input modules ControlLogix diagnostic output modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point group to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use Although some ControlLogix diagnostic I O modules IMPORTANT f rue
205. modules Although analog modules can only use direct connections the system can make both direct and rack connections to the same chassis Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage We recommend that you use a rack connection for applications in which e standard digital I O modules are used e non fused digital output modules are used e your owner controller is running low on connections IMPORTANT Do not use a rack connection for diagnostic I O modules or fused output modules Diagnostic and fused output data will not be transferred over a rack connection This defeats the purpose of using those modules Also remember while a Logix5550 controller allows up to 250 bidirectional connections each individual I O module allows 16 bidirectional connections Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Input Module Operation Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 9 Table 2 A lists the differences between connection types and the advantages disadvantages of each Table 2 A Differences Betw een Direct and Rack Connections Connection Type Advantages Disadvantages Direct connections All input and data echo With more data transferring information is transferred over ControlNet your including diagnostic system does not operate as information and fusing data efficiently as with rack connections Rack connections Connection usage is Input and data echo economized The information is limited to owner controller
206. modules have an additional pages of diagnostic services The following diagnostic e Reset Latched Diagnostics is not used when writing configuration but are only accessed during online monitoring These screens are accessed through the module s properties m ias Pephini Lacak 1 1 GD 2 T Gamas Connection kadus irio Cordpasica Taraa msckslane Reset Latched Diagnostics here Sanur amring EC j e j o Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 6 22 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 M odules Output Online Services Diagnostic output modules have additional pages of diagnostic services The following three diagnostics e Electronic Fuse reset e Reset Latched Diagnostics e Pulse Test are not used when writing configuration but are only accessed during online monitoring These screens are accessed through the module s properties Reset Electronic Fuses here Reset Latched Diagnostics here Perform Pulse Tests here Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 23 View ing and Changing When you create a module a set of tags are created by the Module Tags ControlLogix system that can be viewed in the Tag Editor of RSLogix u g 5000 Each configurable feature on your module has a distinct tag that can be used in the processor s ladder logic You can access a module s tags through RSLogix 5000 as shown below is PA Loge S0
207. moval and insertion under power RIUP This system feature allows you to remove and insert modules and RTB while power is applied For more information on RIUP see page 1 6 e Producer consumer communications These communications are an intelligent data exchange between modules and other system devices in which each module produces data without having been polled e System timestamp of data A 64 bit system clock places a timestamp on the transfer of data between the module and its owner controller within the local chassis e Module level fault reporting and field side diagnostic detection e Class I Division 2 UL CSA FM and CE Agency Certification Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 1 2 What Are ControlLogix Digital I O M odules Using an 1 0 Module in the ControlLogix System Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 ControlLogix modules mount in a ControlLogix chassis and use a Removable Terminal Block RTB ora Bulletin 1492 Interface Module cable that connects to an IFM to connect all field side wiring Before you install and use your module you should have already e installed and grounded a 1756 chassis and power supply To install these products refer to the publications listed in Table 1 A Table 1A Chassis and Power Supply Documentation Catalog Document title Pub number number 1756 A4 A7 ControlLogix Chassis Installation Instructions 1756 IN080B A10 A13 1756 PA72 ControlLog
208. mum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Diagnostic Functions Short Trip NoLload Output Verification Pulse Tes Field Power Loss Zero Cross Time stamp of diagnostics 12A for 500us minimum Off state detection only On state detection only User selectable maximum width amp user selectable maximum time delay from zero cross Detects at 25V peak minimum Firmware phase locked loop lms Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 25V peak Fusing Electronically fused per point Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver W idth for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification
209. n 1756 OH8I 7 52 36 pin 1756 ON8 7 54 20 pin 1756 OV16E 7 56 20 pin 1756 OW161 7 58 36 pin 1756 OXx8 7 60 36 pin Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 7 Assembling The Removable Removable housing covers the wired RTB to protect wiring Terminal Block and the Housing 1 Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with the side edges of the RTB connections when the RTB is seated on the module Side edge of RTB 20858 M 1756 TBCH RTB shown for reference 2 Slide the RTB into the housing until it snaps into place IM PORTANT If additional wire routing space is required for your application use extended depth housing 1756 TBE Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 5 8 Installing the ControlLogix I O M odule Choosing the Extended Depth Housing Maximum Area 336mm2 There are two housing options you must consider when wiring your ControlLogix digital I O module When you order an RTB for your I O module you receive a standard depth housing with the RTB If your application uses heavy gauge wiring you can order an extended depth housing This housing does not come with an RTB You can use one of the following housings e standard depth housing 1756 TBNH TBSH TBCH or TBS6H included with your RTB order e extended depth housing 1756 TBE must be ordered separately The graphic below shows the difference in terms of c
210. n a Single Controller Initial Configuration gt ControllerA Input E ControllerB nitial Configuration a E F m I Input M odule ails ea Input Module Configuration Configuration Data Data XXXXX G ton A Con B XXXXX Zzzzz D XXXXX XXXXX a XXXXX a S Controller B is unaware of changes made by Controller A sc To prevent other owners from receiving potentially erroneous data as described above the following steps must be followed when changing a module s configuration in a multiple owner scenario when online 1 Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software and apply them When you apply new configuration data the software alerts you to inhibit the module recommended if your are using a multiple controller system or perform a bumpless reconfiguration recommended if your are using a single controller system For a complete explanation of a bumpless reconfiguration see page P 2 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 20 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 Repeat step 1 for all owner controllers making the exact same changes in all controllers 3 Disable the Inhibit box in each owner s configuration if you enabled this box in step 1 If all owner controllers have exactly the same PORTANT configur
211. nd use the data from there TIP To minimize traffic and conserve bandwidth we recommend you use a larger RPI value if the COS option is used and the module is located in the same P gt chassis as its owner If an input module physically resides in a chassis other than where the owner controller is i e a remote chassis connected via ControlNet the role of the RPI and the module s COS behavior changes slightly with respect to getting data to the owner The RPI and COS behavior still define when the module will multicast data within its own chassis as described in the previous section but only the value of the RPI determines when the owner controller will receive it over the network Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 12 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System When an RPI value is specified for an input module in a remote chassis in addition to instructing the module to multicast data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI but the control system will guarantee that the owner controller will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI Input M odule in Remote Chassis with Data Coming At Least as Often as RPI
212. nductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation W iring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 28 Module Specific Information 1756 0A16 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format CST timestamped fuse 6 6 data output data Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module am FES TG ors BTS NOTES 1 Do not physically connect 7 7 i more than two wires to a outa K Ge single RTB terminal OUT 7 i IZ When you daisy chain Daisy chain I E from a group to other to other L1 0 i IAT RTBs always connectthe RTBs a D ID daisy chain as shown QUT 9 ie IEB 2 This wiring example T4 B shows a single voltage OUT 11 ee i source 3 If separate power OUT 13 ig sources are used do not J umper i U7 exceed the specified wire OUT 15 WO isolation voltage L1 1 ie D D
213. ng for this feature is always enabled For a more detailed explanation of these features see page 2 10 Softw are Configurable Filter Times ON to OFF and OFF to ON filter times can be adjusted through RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix diagnostic input modules These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules For an example of how to set filter times see page 6 14 for diagnostic input modules Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules ControlLogix diagnostic input modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options Some applications require power for the I O circuits to originate on separate isolated power sources Because these conditions require separate commons for each channel some input modules use individual isolation or point to point isolation Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix diagnostic input modules are channel to channel isolation and no isolation Your specific application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 15 Multiple Point Densities ControlLogix diagnostic input modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Open Wire Detection Open Wire is used to make sure the field wiring is connected to the module The field device must provide a m
214. nts Points D 0B16D Fuse module DINT DINT Pulse Test Performs a pulse 4c le 1 N A Pulse_Test_ 10 N A 1756 0A8 test on the point output Parameters D OB16D Only test one point module SINT 10 at a time Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Ladder Logic B 7 Some services require multiple parameters tags in the source and destination fields e g Pulse Test These services use copy instructions to move the multiple tags to from the message instruction source destination tags Table 2 lists the copy instruction parameters need for these services Table B 2 Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Source Destination Description Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data Tag in MSG to from generic source destination buffers pastucton Source Destination Length bytes Pulse_Test_Paramet Determines which point to perform the Enable_32_points Pulse_Test_Parameters 4 ers SINT 10 pulse test on Each bit corresponds toa DINT 0 point Only test one point at a time Determines maximum pulse width of the Pulse Width Pulse_Test_Parameters 2 pulse test in ms Pulse test inverts state INT 4 of the output up to the maximum specified time Units are in 100us increments Default tag value 2ms i e 20 For AC modules only this specifies how Zero Cross Delay Pulse_Test_Parameters 2 long to delay after the zero cross before
215. nts on this M anual If you find a problem with this manual please notify us of it on the enclosed Publication Problem Report j Introduction New and Revised Information Summary of Changes This release of this document contains updated information Changes are designated by change bars in margin as shown to the left The table below lists the new and revised information included in this release of the ControlLogix digital I O modules user manual Table Summary of Changes 1 New and Revised Information Information About New or Revised Location Internal M odule Operations New Chapter 2 Connections Revised Chapter 2 Electronic Keying Revised Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Output Data Echo Revised Chapter 3 Chapter 4 1756 IV16 M odule New Chapter 3 Chapter 7 1756 IV32 M odule New Chapter 3 Chapter 7 1756 OV16E M odule New Chapter 3 Chapter 7 Additional Index Terms Revised and New Index Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Summary of Changes 2 Notes Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 About This User M anual Preface What This Preface Contains This preface describes how to use this manual The following table escribes what this preface contains and its location Who Should Use This Manual Purpose of This Manual For information about Who Should Use This M anual See page Preface 1 Purpose of This M anual Preface 1 Related Terms Preface 2 Rela
216. odule is inhibited the outputs will turn off ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 13 Output Data Echo During normal operation when a processor sends an output command out to the ControlLogix system the output module that is targeted for that command will retum the commanded state of the output to the system to verify the module received the command and will try to execute it Other devices can use this broadcast signal via a listen only connection to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the owner controller M onitor Fault Bits The Output Data Echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is a problem with the module the commanded state and the Output Data Echo may not match You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions If a fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data echo may not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the Output Data Echo check your output module for the following conditions e Communications fault e Connection is inhibited e Blown fuse Module will not tum ON output if overload short circuit is detected e Loss of field power 1756 OA8D and 1756 OA8E only Module will not tum ON output if no AC power is detected
217. odules Input Modules As shown below ControlLogix input modules receive a signal at the RTB and process it internally i e hardware delay filter delay ASIC delay before sending a signal to the ControlBus via the Requested Packet Interval RPI or at the Change of State COS I I Hardware delay Filter delay ASIC delay i I I Oh I Varies between User configurable 200uS scan Signal sent to modules and i ControlBus application configuration 42701 EXAMPLE Many factors e g module type voltage temperature if the module is turning ON or OFF affect the signal propogation delay on a module But a typical delay time can be estimated For example if you are turning ON a 1756 IB16 module the signal propogation delay is affected by e hardware delay to energize the module typically 200uS on this module e user configurable filter time 0 1 or 2mS e ASIC scan 200uS In the best case scenario i e filter time of OmS the 1756 IB16 module has a 400uS signal propogation delay at 24V dc in 25 C These times are not guaranteed We list maximum delay times for each module in the specificatons Signal received Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 5 Output Modules ControlLogix output modules receive a signal from the controller and process it internally i e ASIC delay and hardware delay before sending a signal to the output device via the RTB
218. oftware to set configuration for your ControlLogix digital I O module You have the option of accepting default configuration for your module or writing point level configuration specific to your application Both options are explained in detail including views of software screens in this chapter When you use the RSLogix 5000 software to configure a ControlLogix digital I O module you must perform the following steps 1 Create a new module 2 Accept the default configuration or change it to specific configuration for the module 3 Edit configuration for a module when changes are needed Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 3 The following diagram shows an overview of the configuration process Click on the Next Button to Set Specific Configuration NEXT lt New M odule 1 Select a module from the list 2 Choose a M ajor Revision Naming Screen Name Description Slot number Comm format M inor revision Keying choice Click on the Finish Button to Use Default Configuration gt FINISH Series of Application Specific Make custom creen configuration choices here Edit a module s configuration here Configuration complete f Pop up menu leads to a module s configuration properties f p A series of tabs in RSLogix 5000 provide access to change a module s conf
219. ogix input Modules ControlLogix output Modules For module Refer to For module Refer to 1756 1A16 7 2 1756 0A16 7 28 1756 IA16l 7 4 1756 0A161 7 30 1756 IA8D 7 6 1756 0A8 7 32 1756 1B16 7 8 1756 OA8D 7 34 1756 1B16D 7 10 1756 OA8E 7 36 1756 1B161 7 12 1756 0B16D 1 38 1756 1B32 7 14 1756 OB16E 7 40 1756 1C16 7 16 1756 0B161 7 42 1756 1H161 7 18 1756 0B32 7 44 1756 IM161 7 20 1756 OB8 7 46 1756 IN16 7 22 1756 OB8El 7 48 1756 IV16 7 24 1756 0C8 7 50 1756 1V32 7 26 1756 OH8I 7 52 1756 ON8 7 54 1756 OV16E 7 56 1756 OW16l 7 58 1756 OX8I 7 60 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 2 Module Specific Information 1756 1A16 Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 11 ON OFF 9ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module wa iao no Hep m 4 e n3 JHE FAG IN2 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same IN 5 ie TD IN 4 Group 0 name are connected together on the module For example L2 can Daisy IN 7 ie 3 1N 6 be connected to any terminal chain to marked L2 0 other RTBs L2 0 ee ie L2 0 2 Do not ph
220. ogram Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module outi GSS ouo OUT 3 Nb 1 OUT 2 DID S OUT 5 ES I1 OUT 4 roup DID OUT 7 ee ie OUT 6 DC 0 eS f RTN OUT 0 Daisy chain 3 KD to other OUT 9 aS OUT 8 RTBs DID OUT 11 D iG OUT 10 i Ez N J umper D iG OUT 12 Group 1 wire DID ors o 49 IE IEB RTN ouT 1 TA DC COM 42551 Surge Current Chart LED indicator DC 0 5 gt gt DC OUTPUT OUT 0 2A Coniidous ST01234567 3 pia 60 C FUSE i K gt 1A ST 89 WULRBUE RTN FUSE E OUT 0 i Electronic Ti 10ms ELECTRONICALLY FUSED y Ime Fuse Circuitry 40851 M 40464 M Module Specific Information 7 57 1756 OV16E Specifications Number of Outputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 210mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 1 12W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 6 72W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 22 94 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30 0V dc Output Current Rating Per Point 1A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 2A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 2mA per output Maximum On State Voltage Drop 700mV dc 1A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON lms maximum ON to OFF lms maximum Diagnostic Functions Short Trip 5A for 20mS 24V dc Output ON
221. om owner OC at module s RPI only Immediate backplan transfers to module CCC lI 7 Output data at least as often as RPI ControlNet 42675 The reserved spot on the network and when the controller sends the output data are asynchronous to each other This means there are Best and Worst Case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated channel data from the module in a networked chassis Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 16 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the Best Case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remotely located output module receives the data almost immediately Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the Worst Case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the output module does not receive data until the next available network slot Table 2 D shows the Best Case and Worst Case times for output data sent from a controller to reach the output module Table 2 D Best and Worst Cas
222. ommunications fault sets all bits in the M odule Fault Word a A Fuse Blown Field Power Loss No Load or Output Verify condition sets the appropriate bitin the M odule Fault Word Pprop Group 1 Group 0 Fuse Blown Word A blown fuse for any point group sets the bit for that point group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets the appropriate bit bits in the M odule Fault W ord Group 1 Group 0 Field Pow er Loss Word 1 1756 OA8D only A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the Field Power Loss W ord and also sets the appropriate bits in the M odule Fault W ord No Load Word 1 A No Load condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the No Load Word and also sets the appropriate bit in the M odule Fault W ord Output Verify Word 41457 An Output Verify condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the Output Verify W ord and also sets the appropriate bit in the M odule Fault Word Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features 4 29 Cha pter
223. on 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Troubleshooting YourModule 8 5 Notification in Tag Editor A fault has occurred for any point that lists the number 1 in the Fault line Determining Fault Type When you are monitoring a module s configuration properties in RSLogix 5000 and receive a Communications fault message the Connection page lists the type of fault The fault type is listed here For a detailed listing of the possible faults their causes and suggested solutions see Module Faults in the online help Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 8 6 Troubleshooting Your M odule Cha pter Summary and In this chapter you learned about troubleshooting the module J What s Next Move on to Appendix A Using Software Configuration Tags Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Appendix A Using Software Configuration Tags IMPORTANT Although this appendix presents the option of changing a module s configuration through the Tag Editor of RSLogix 5000 we suggest that you use the module s properties tabs to change configuration when possible When you create a module module defined data types and tags are created These Tags allow you to access the Input and Output Data and Configuration of Data of the module via the controller s ladder logic The types of tags created vary for each module There is also variation among the tags for any particular module depending on which communications format you chos
224. ondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum a eae i fi Listed Industrial Control Equipment is marked Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D 3 M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 42 1756 M odule Specific Information OB 16l Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode F
225. onize the output turning OFF to ON based upon the time that the input transitioned OFF to ON The program can be extended to include synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output modules For this example the output will follow the state of the input 0 but it will be delayed by exactly 10ms The advantage of using CST over timers is that the synchronization is being performed at the I O module which eliminates any jitter due to controller or communication delays Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads For this synchronization to work properly the 10ms delay must be long enough to account for any controller backplane and network delays The input and output modules must reside in the same rack as a Time Master i e Controller Timestamp units are usecs Project cst1 SHRMMAHKAMAKAAAAANAAMAAAKAAAAAARAARARAAAAAKAANRAAAAANAN RANA HAKAN KAMARA RAHA HAHAHAHA RAE HR RH IID Rungs 0 and 1 are used to detect the transition from PROGRAM to always_on init 0 RUN mode This is used to turn ON init which causes the program to initialize its tags 1 Move Source Time_at_which_Input_Changed_0 991817889 Dest LastTimestamp 0 991817889 Rung 2 only executes once and 2 initializes the LastTimestamp LastTimestamp is used to detect a Change of State on the input point by checking to see if the timestamp of the input data has changed
226. ontinuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 23 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001
227. or example DC J umper DC 0 F i OUT 2 COM can be connected to wire Gui ID D either terminal marked roup DC 0 TH i OUT 3 RTN OUT 1 GD B 2 Do not physically connect RTN OUT 0 ie ie RTN OUT more than two wires toa single RTB terminal W hen DC 1 ie ie OUT 4 you daisy chain from a 7 group to another RTB DC 1 IS D always connect the daisy i i chain as shown el IS D 3 This wiring example shows DC 1 H H a single voltage source A I R 4 If separate power sources RTN OUT 1 ie IEB are used do not exceed the a specified isolation voltage ax DC COM 40181 M Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator DC 0 45v gt a Surge G gt DC OUTPUT M OUT 0 3 ae Hi c ti A RTN a ST01234567 0 VY OUT 0 2A i 4 gt 6 lt ControlBus Interface Display 7 30347 M Time 40849 M 40466 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 47 1756 OB 8 Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 165mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 89W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 2 5W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 8 53 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30V dc Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each
228. ors around the world Allen Bradley PEAME DOGE Americas Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Heo Ro ckwell European Headquarters SA NV avenue Herrmann Debroux 46 1160 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 06 00 Fax 32 2 663 06 40 Asia Pacific Headquarters 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Automation Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 PN 957345 93 Supersedes Publication 1756 6 5 8 J uly 1999 2001 Rockwell International Corporation Printed in the U S A
229. ort a failure because conditions when the point is OFF indicate the possible absence of a field device in this case though the No Load bit will not be set see pages 4 12 amp 4 13 IM PORTANT The Pulse Test does not guarantee the absence of a load It merely indicates this condition is possible Pulse Test is a service that needs to be executed from an RSLogix 5000 program or the module properties page using the pulse test tab and should be verified with your load to make sure that there are no false transitions For an example of how to perform a Pulse Test using ladder logic see page B 13 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 24 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Point Level Electronic Fusing Diagnostic output modules use electronic fusing to protect output points from the surge of too much current through that point on the module If too much current begins to flow through a point the fuse is tripped and a point level fault is sent to the controller Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or through ladder logic running on a controller This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse in RSLogix 5000 see page 6 22 For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse
230. plane power 0 84W M ax Power Dissipation M odule 5 8W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 19 78 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 10 30V dc Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc On State Current 2mA 10V dc minimum 13mA 30V dc maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 5V dc M inimum Off State Current 1 5mA per point Maximum Input 2 31kQ Impedance 30V dc Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter Oms Ims amp 2ms 1ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter Oms 1ms 9ms amp 18ms 4ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Open wire Off state leakage current 1 2mA minimum Time stamp of diagnostics ms Change of state Software configurable Timestamp on inputs 200s Cyclic Update Time User selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes M aximum Inrush Current 250mA Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to
231. ple input points for COS your module generates a unique CST each time any of those input points change state as long as the ie changes do not occur within 500uS of each other If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500us of each other a single CST value is generated for all making it appear that they changed at exactly the same time Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 8 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Timestamping In Conjunction with Scheduled Outputs Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled outputs feature so that after input data changes state and a timestamp occurs an output point will actuate at some configured time in the future You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs you must e choose a Communications Format for each input and output module that allows timestamping For more information on choosing a Communications Format see Chapter 6 e have a controller in the same rack as both I O modules e disable Change of State for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped For scheduled outputs to work most effectively a remember the following ea e The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for any controller backplane and network delays e The I O modules must
232. put as OFF No Load bit is set Field Power Loss bit is set L1 or L2 are disconnected or outside the 47 63Hz frequency range ame AUN Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as ON 2 Output Verify bit is set 2 3 4 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as OFF 2 Pulse Test fails Hardware point damage 1 Itis not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the OFF state If a short circuit occurs the output point is turned OFF and the fault appears in the OFF state until the point is reset 2 When pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display 3 The output cannot turn ON due to hardw are point damage 4 Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned OFF 5 During normal operating conditions hardware damage should not be possible An output shorted to L2 may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to L2 as a possible cause See Table 4 C for possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OB16D module Table 4 C 1756 OB16D Diagnostic Fault Table Ladder Commands the Output to be ON Ladder Commands the Output to be OFF Possible Cause of Fault 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the
233. put communications format 6 6 Choosing a timestamped output communications format 6 7 Diagnostic timestamp 4 11 Schedule outputs 3 7 4 7 Timestamping inputs 3 7 4 7 Using scheduled outputs with timestamping 3 8 4 8 Using timestamping P 3 1 1 T Tag Editor Downloading new configuration A 14 Timestamping 6 6 6 7 Considering module major revision 3 9 4 9 Diagnostic Timestamp 4 11 For a sequence of events 3 7 4 7 M arking input data change with relative time reference P 3 3 7 4 7 System timestamp 1 1 Tip for using change of state 3 7 4 7 Used with scheduled outputs 3 8 4 8 6 8 B 10 Tips Conserving ControlNet bandwidth 2 11 Electronic keying options 3 5 4 5 Scheduled outputs 3 8 4 8 Using change of state in timestamping 3 7 4 7 Using listen only communications format 6 6 Using pulse test 4 22 Troubleshooting Fault status 3 10 4 10 Fuse status 3 10 4 10 I O status 3 10 4 10 M odule status 3 10 4 10 M odule status indicators 1 4 3 10 4 10 8 1 8 2 Using RSLogix 5000 8 4 Types of ControlLogix 1 0 M odules 1 2 U UL Certification 1 1 3 11 4 11 W Warnings Preventing electrostatic discharge 1 6 Removal and insertion under power RIUP 1 6 Wiring Connections Choosing the extended depth housing 5 8 Field wiring options 3 14 4 19 Isolated and non isolated modules 3 12 4 14 Recommendations for wiring RTB 5 5 Using the cage clamp RTB 5 4 Using the interface module
234. r Communications 1 1 Network model 1 1 2 9 2 14 3 9 4 9 Product Identification Catalog number 3 4 4 4 M ajor revision P 3 3 4 4 4 M inor revision P 3 3 4 4 4 Product type 3 4 4 4 Vendor 3 4 4 4 Program M ode P 3 Reconfiguring the module 6 18 Index 5 Pulse Test Diagnostic output modules 4 22 Performing with ladder logic B 13 Usage tips 4 22 R Rack Connection 2 7 2 8 Usage recommendations 2 8 Rack Connections P 3 2 7 Rack Optimization P 3 2 7 2 8 6 6 Rack Optimization Communications Format 6 8 Remote Chassis Configuring remote 1 0 modules 6 19 General I O module operation 2 3 Using input modules 2 11 Scenarios for data transfer 2 13 Using output modules 2 15 Scenarios for data transfer 2 16 Remote Connections P 3 Remote Run Mode Reconfiguring the module 6 17 Removable Terminal Block RTB P 3 1 2 1 4 5 2 Installing 5 10 Mechanically keying the RTB 5 2 Removing 5 12 Using with the housing 5 7 Wiring the RTB 5 4 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP P 3 1 1 1 6 3 3 4 3 5 1 Requested Packet Interval RPI P 3 2 10 3 11 4 14 4 16 4 25 Adjusting in RSLogix 5000 6 10 6 18 Retrieving M odule Identification Information 1 5 B 14 Retrieving Module Status 1 5 B 14 RS Logix 5000 Configuring 1 0 modules 2 2 3 3 4 3 6 2 Filter times 3 11 4 14 I O modules in remote chassis 2 3 Using software configuration tags A 1 Using to troubleshoot 8 4 Using with RSNetW orx 2 2 RSNetW orx 1 0 modules
235. r I O Data CSTTimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with 8 bytes Scheduled Outputs and Coordinated System Time CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST Timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data Output data Off On status for the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 On Diagnostic Input Module Tags Tables A 6 and A 7 list and define all tags that may be used for ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules Input modules have two types of tags e configuration e input data IM PORTANT The table below lists all possible diagnostic input module tags In each application though the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Configuration Tags Table A 6 Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or I O Data COSOnOffEn Configuration Change of State ON to OFF Triggers an event in the controller for ON to Lbit per point OFF transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated O disable 1 enable COS OffOnEn Configuration Change of State OFF to ON Triggers an event in the controller for OFF to 1 bit per point ON transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The
236. r Revision e If the module has a Major Revision 1 it will always return a positive timestamping value e If the module has a Major Revision gt 2 it will return a negative timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner controller and the first Change of State condition occurs Look at the Module Properties page of RSLogix 5000 to determine if the module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the controller is synchronized with the CST For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules with the CST see the ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 Producer Consumer M odel By using the Producer Consumer model ControlLogix I O modules can produce data without having been polled by a controller first The modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to consume it For example a diagnostic input module produces data and any number of processors can consume the data at the same time This eliminates the need for one processor to send the data to another processor For a more detailed explanation of this process see Chapter 2 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 10 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 LED Status Information Each ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O module has an LED indicator on the front of the module that allows you to check the mo
237. r Revision Change that affects the module s function or RSLogix 5000 interface e Minor Revision Change that does not affects the module s function or RSLogix 5000 interface The comparison is made between the keying information present in the I O module and the keying information in the controller s program This feature can prevent the inadvertent operation of a control system with the wrong module in the wrong slot Exact M atch All of the parameters listed above must match or the inserted module will reject a connection to the controller ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 5 Compatible M atch The Compatible Match mode allows an I O module to determine whether it can emulate the module defined in the configuration sent from the controller With ControlLogix digital I O modules the module can emulate older revisions The module will accept the configuration if the configuration s major minor revision is less than or equal to the physical module s revision For example if the configuration contains a majorminor revision of 2 7 the module inserted into the slot must have a firmware revision of 2 7 or higher for a connection to be made TIP We recommend using Compatible Match whenever possible Remember though the module will only p work to the level of the configuration For example if a slot is configured for a module with major minor revision of 2 7 and you insert a module with a major minor r
238. r to a point on the module It s tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is only available on 1756 OA8E module For more information on field power loss see page 3 17 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits But because the module is an 8 point module only the first 8 bits bits0 7 are used in the Module Fault Word Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 20 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Fault bits in the Fuse Blown Word Field Power Loss Word No Load Word and Output Verify Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things It can indicate e A communications fault In this case all 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density e A fuse blown condition In this case only the bit affected is set to 1 e A field power loss condition In this case only the bit affected is set to 1 e A no load condition In this case only the bit affected is set to 1 e An output verify condition In this case only the bit affected is set to 1 The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital output modules Bit 31 Bit 0
239. rces are 7 J used do not exceed the specified a ae F 30245 M isolation voltage Simplified schematic LED indicator N 2 DCINPUT IN 0 i 2 ST01234567 0 GND 0 Y 4 ST 89 WULBUB K ee A j 6 GND gt ControlBus Display Interface 30183 M 20945 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 13 1756 1B 161 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V dc amp 3mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 58W Maximum Power Dissipation M odule 5W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 17 05 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 10 30V dc Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc On State Current 2mA 10V dc minimum 10mA 30 V dc maximum M aximum Off State Voltage 5V dc M aximum Off State Current 1 5mA Max Input Impedance 30V dc 3kQ Input Delay Time OFF to ON Hardware delay ON to OFF Hardware delay Programmable filter Oms 1ms or 2ms 1ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms 4ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of state Software configurable Time stamp of inputs 200s M aximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable L00us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User side to system side 100 tested at 254
240. reside in the same rack as the timemaster For a detailed example of how to write ladder logic to use these features see Appendix B ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 9 Module M ajor Revision Considerations with Timestamping When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O modules remember the following conditions that may occur depending on the module s Major Revision e If the module has a Major Revision 1 it will always return a positive timestamping value e If the module has a Major Revision gt 2 it will return a negative timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner controller and the first Change of State condition occurs Look at the Module Properties page of RSLogix 5000 to determine if the module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the controller is synchronized with the CST For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules with the CST see the ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 Producer Consumer M odel By using the Producer Consumer model ControlLogix I O modules can produce data without having been polled by a controller first The modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to consume it For example an input module produces data and any number of processors can consume the data at the same time This eliminates the need for one processor to send the
241. ring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 44 M odule Specific Information 1756 0B 32 NOTES 1 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown This wiring example uses a single voltage source If separate power N w sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Configurable features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module Group 0 Daisy chain to other RTBs J umper Group 1 wire M OUT 1 2 11g OUT 3 Jaq 4 oe OUT 5 6 5 OUT 7 js 7 OUT 9 Jay 10 91a OUT 11 Jai e uk OUT 13 JQ 4 s OUT 15 DH 16 15 4 DC 0 ne 18 17 OUT 17 E 19 OUT 19 q 22 21 QUT 21 AY 24 23 OUT 23 AY 26 25 OUT 25 ZN 28 27 OUT 27 30 29 OUT 29
242. ronic fuse module service on channel 0 of a 1756 OA8D module where to perform service Heccage Loniqunateen Slobt_Cnl_Heec l_fuce Ei Configaaston Communication Skad CHI Rest Fine E ie Tl Comat Tag Enable J Eesti inti a Ghat of Dione Dene Ler 0 ot Enor Coca M Tas Eaerded Enu Cok a O __ Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 B 6 Using Ladder Logic Table B 2 contains information that must be entered on the configuration pop up screen to perform I O module services Table B 1 Module Services and Configuration Pop Up Screen Information Service Description Service Object Type Object ID Object Source Number of Destination Modules Code Attribute Elements bytes Retrieve Obtain module s 1 71 1 N A N A 0 CST_Information All CST CST status and at informatio check if module is 20 n synchronized with the CST Retrieve Obtain module s 1 1 1 N A N A 0 WHO_Information All Device general status SINT 48 Informatio such as n WHO ownership health and identity Resetthe Reset module to 5 1 1 N A N A 0 N A All Module out of the box condition and go through a power up Reset Clear any latched 4b 1d input 1 N A Enable_3 4 N A 1756 0A8 Latched faults except Fuse modules 2_ Points D OB16D Diagnostic Blown le DINT OA8E output IA8D modules IB16D only Reset Reset blown fuse 4d le 1 N A Enable_3 4 Results_32_ 1756 0A8 Electronic status for a point output 2_Poi
243. roup User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked AN Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 16 Module Specific Information
244. s 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Diagnostic Functions Fuse Blown 1 Fuse and indicator group Time stamp of diagnostics 1ms Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 75 maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 60V peak Fusing Mechanically fused group 3 15A 250V ac slow blow 1500A interruption current Littelfuse p n H2153 15 Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm M odule Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 2 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 134 Screw driver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification Ui Listed Industrial Control Equipment a i or packaging HA Certified Process Control Equipment Cer
245. s 2ms 9ms or 18ms 2ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of State Software configurable Timestamp of Inputs 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable L00us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A clamp 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screw driver Blade W idth for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification when product is marked Uy Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this condu
246. s Change of State Software configurable Time Stamp of Inputs 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100s minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A clamp 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 23 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification when product is marked Uy Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D 3 M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the syst
247. s a chassis specific time that is not synchronized with or in any way connected to the time generated over ControlNet to establish a NUT as described in Chapter 2 You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and full diagnostic input data with a relative time reference i e the value of the CST of when that input data changes state Because only one CST value is returned to the IMPORTANT a controller when any input point changes state it is recommended that you use timestamping on only one input point per module Timestamping for a Sequence of Events The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a particular input module point by timestamping the input data To determine a sequence of events you must e Set the input module s communications format to Full diagnostics input data e Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence will occur Disable COS for all other points on the module TIP If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS your module generates a unique CST each time any of those input points change state as long as the ie changes do not occur within 500uS of each other If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500us of each other a single CST value is generated for all making it appear that they changed at exactly the same time Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 8 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I
248. s in a remote chassis with respect to the owner controller the owner controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI rate specified for the module Updates are not performed at the end of the owner controller s program scan Whenever the module receives data from the controller it immediately multicasts the output commands it received to the rest of the system The actual output data is echoed by the output module as input data and multicast back out onto the network This is called Output Data Echo The Output Data Echo also may contain fault and diagnostic information depending on the module type IM PORTANT In this Producer Consumer model the output module is the Consumer of the controller s output data and the Producer of the data echo When you specify an RPI value for a digital output module you instruct the owner controller when to broadcast the output data to the module If the module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller the module receives the data almost immediately after the owner controller sent it backplane transfer times are small AA A Owner controller Output module oO ood o Data sent from owner at the end oh every program scan and the RPI oros 40949 Depending on the value of the RPI with re
249. se is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short circuit condition for an output point All FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the User O no fault 1 fault NoLoad Input data No Load Diagnostic which indicates the absence of a load e g the wire is 1 bit per group disconnected from the module This diagnostic only operates in the OFF State O no fault 1 fault OutputVerifyFault Input data Output Verify Diagnostic which indicates that the output has been 1 bit per point commanded to the ON state but the output has not been verified to be ON O no fault 1 fault output is not ON Output Data Tag Table A 10 Diagnostic Output M odule Output Data Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or I O Data CSTTimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with 8 bytes Scheduled Outputs and Coordinated System Time CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST Timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data Output data Off On status for the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 0n Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Software Configuration Tags A 11 Accessing the Tags When you access tags you have two options You can e monitor tags option allows you to view tags and change their values e edit tags option
250. set to 1 The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital input modules Bit 0 Module Fault W ord All modules Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 A communications fault sets all bits in the M odule Fault Word A Field Power Loss or Open W ire condition sets the appropriate bit in the M odule Fault Word 42676 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controller ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 19 ControlLogix digital output modules multicast fault status data to any owner listening controllers All output modules maintain a Module Fault Word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions as shown on the next page The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred e Module Fault Word This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital output modules e Fuse Blown Word This word indicates a point group fuse blown on the module It s tag name is FuseBlown This word is only available on 1756 OA16 1756 OA8E 1756 0 B16E 1756 O B8EI and 1756 OV16E modules For more information on fusing see page 3 14 e Field Power Loss Word This word indicates a loss of field powe
251. software to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve e serial number e revision information e catalog number e vendor identification e error fault information e diagnostic counters By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 4 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Electronic Keying Instead of plastic mechanical backplane keys electronic keying allows the ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the various slots of a configured system During module configuration you must choose one of the following keying options for your I O module e Exact Match e Compatible Match e Disable Keying The options above are described later in this section When the controller attempts to connect to and configure an I O module e g after program download the module compares the following parameters before allowing the connection and configuration to be accepted e Vendor e Product Type e Catalog Number e Major Revision e Minor Revision The comparison is made between the keying information present in the I O module and the keying information in the controllers program This feature can prevent the inadvertent operation of a control system with the wrong module in the wrong slot Exact M atch All of the
252. spect to the length of the program scan the output module can receive and echo data multiple times during one program scan Output Modules in a Remote Chassi S Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 15 If an output module physically resides in a chassis other than that of the owner controller i e a remote chassis connected via ControlNet the owner controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI rate specified Updates are not performed at the end of the controllers program scan In addition the role of the RPI for a remote output module changes slightly with respect to getting data from the owner controller When an RPI value is specified for an output module in a remote chassis in addition to instructing the owner controller to multicast the output data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI but the control system will guarantee that the output module will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI Output M odule in Remote Chassis with Data Coming At Leastas Often as RPI A A A A Owner controller ControlNet Bridge module ControlNet Bridge module Output module E l Data sent fr
253. stedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input 8 bytes data including fusing see BlownFuse NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data Input data Data Off On status for the output point ECHOED back from the output 1 bit per point module This is used to verify proper communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 1 On Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and 1 bit per point 0 data for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module will be faulted O no fault 1 fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FuseBlown Input Data Fuse is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or 1 bit per point overload condition for an output point All FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the User O no fault 1 fault Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 A 6 Using Software Configuration Tags Output Data Tag Table A 5 Standard Output Module Output Data Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor o
254. stic output module can tell a controller that it received a command and whether or not the field side device connected to the module has executed the command For example in applications that need to verify that the module has accurately followed the processor s instructions the module samples the field side state and compares it to the system side state This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A If an output cannot be verified a point level fault is sent to the controller For an example of how to enable the Output Verify diagnostic see page 6 15 Pulse Test Pulse Test is a feature found on diagnostic output modules that can verify output circuit functionality without actually changing the state of the output load device A short pulse is sent to the targeted output circuit The circuit should respond as it would if a real change of state command was issued but the load device does not transition TIP Consider the following when using the Pulse Test e Only use the test when the output state does not gt transition for long periods of time Normal diagnostics will catch faults if the outputs are transitioning regularly e When first performing the pulse test it is recommended that you verify the load will not transition You should be at the actual load while the test is performed ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I
255. sting for all 1 0 modules 6 9 Output module formats 6 7 Rack optimization P 3 6 6 6 8 Scheduled output data 6 7 Usage tip 6 6 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Index 2 Compatible Match Electronic keying 3 5 4 5 Configuration Accessing module tags 6 23 A 11 Altering the default configuration 6 10 Changing through module tags A 12 Configuring a diagnostic input module 6 14 Configuring a diagnostic output module 6 15 Configuring a nondiagnostic input module 6 12 Configuring a nondiagnostic output module 6 13 Configuring modules in remote chassis 6 19 Creating a new module 6 4 Downloading new data A 14 Downloading new data from the tag editor A 14 Dynamic reconfiguration 6 16 Editing configuration in RSLogix 5000 6 16 Local vs remote chassis 6 2 M essage configuration with ladder logic B 4 Overview of the process 6 2 Reconfiguring in program mode 6 18 Reconfiguring in remote run mode 6 17 Using module tags A 3 A 4 A 6 A 8 Using RSLogix 5000 6 2 Using the default configuration 6 10 Configuring a ControlLogix System Using RSLogix 5000 2 2 Using RSNetW orx 2 2 Connections P 2 2 6 Connector pins on the module 1 4 ControlBus P 2 1 4 Differences between direct and rack connections 2 9 Direct connection P 2 2 6 Listen only connection P 2 Listen only rack optimization 2 7 Number allowed 2 6 2 7 2 8 Rack connection 2 7 Rack optimization 2 7 2 8 6 6 ControlBus Connector P 2 1 4 Controller Logix5550 Controller P 1
256. t C Base C Aljas Consumed Choose the Message Data Type here DataType MESSAGE KI Configure Choose the Base Tag Type here Choose the Controller Scope here IM PORTANT M essage tags can only be created with the Controller Scope Click here to see the message Fill in the following information when the New Tag pop up screen appears We suggest you name the tag to indicate what IM PORTANT f 4 Raed i module service the message instruction is sending For example the message instruction below is used to reset an electronic fuse and the tag is named to reflect this User_manualfcontroller hal Style 7 F Produce this tag for up to E consumers Enter Message Configuration After creating a new tag you must enter message configuration configuration pop up screens Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Message Type is CIP Generic steseefge PlitGeere of e h He SM ewer l Bees Service Code is 4d Object Type is 1e Object ID is 1 Object Attribute is left blank Using Ladder Logic B 5 Enter message configuration on the following screens e Configuration pop up screen e Communications pop up screen A description of the purpose and set up of each screen follows Configuration Pop Up Screen This pop up screen provides information on what module service to perform and where to perform it For example you must use this screen to reset an elect
257. t used Group 0 T E o 1 Mtes sow 1 1 ED EB our 4 14 13 u ED Ie ors Group 1 umper gt L1 1 I 1 meee wire lt TH rt iO our 7 1 L1 1 ap i Not used Group 1 A E l2 40178 M Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart 5V L1 0 5 p i 204 SE Y aJ z E im ae onl OUT 0 Control Bus Interface 2A Display i 0 41161 M Time 40852 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 LED indicator G gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST012345670 K 20978 M Module Specific Information 7 33 1756 OA8 Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common M odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 200mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 1 07W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 1W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Point Per Module 2A max 60 C Linear derating 5A max 30 C amp 4A max 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak 2A amp 6V peak current lt S0mA Max Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA 0 2V us for loads lt S0mA Output Delay Time OFF to
258. ta transfer link between the controller and the device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references When module configuration data is downloaded to an owner controller the controller attempts to establish a direct connection to each of the modules referenced by the data If a controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control system the controller periodically checks for the presence of a device there When a device s presence is detected there the controller automatically sends the configuration data If the data is appropriate to the module found in the slot a connection is made and operation begins If the configuration data is not appropriate the data is rejected and an error message displays in the software In this case the configuration data can be inappropriate for any of a number of reasons For example a module s configuration data may be appropriate except for a mismatch in electronic keying that prevents normal operation The controller maintains and monitors its connection with a module Any break in the connection such as module faults or removal of the module from the chassis while under power causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area associated with the module The RSLogix 5000 software monitors this data area to annunciate the modules failures While a Logix5550 controller allows up to 250 eee bidirectional connections each individual I O module allows
259. tage 20V aximum Off State Current 2 5mA aximum Input Impedance 132V ac 10 15kQ 60Hz nput Delay Time Off to on Hardware delay On to off Hardware delay Programmable filter Ims amp 2ms 10ms maximum plus filter time Programmable filter 9ms amp 18ms 8ms maximum plus filter time Diagnostic Functions Change of State Timestamp of Inputs Software configurable 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Change of State on Inputs Software configurable Within 200us Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100us minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximu Agency Certification when product is marked Uy Listed Industrial Control
260. ted Products and Documentation Preface 4 You must be able to program and operate an Allen Bradley ControlLogix Logix5550 controller to efficiently use your digital I O modules We assume that you know how to do this in this manual If you do not refer to the Logix5550 Controller documentation before you attempt to use this module Table C lists related documentation This manual describes how to install configure and troubleshoot your ControlLogix digital I O module Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Preface 2 Related Terms Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 This manual uses the following terms Table Preface B Related Terms This term Means Broadcast Data transmissions to all address or functions Bumpless A reconfiguration in which the real time data connection to the reconfiguration module is not closed and reopened Communications are never interrupted and configuration data is applied to the module immediately This works best in a single owner controller system Change of state COS Any change in the ON or OFF state of a point on an I O module Communications Format that defines the type of information transferred format between an I O module and its owner controller This format also defines the tags created for each I O module Compatible match An electronic keying protection mode that requires that the physical module and the module configured in the softw
261. ted and what action should be taken to resume normal operation Fully Softw are Configurable The RSLogix 5000 software uses a custom easily understood interface to write configuration All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration portion of the software You can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve e serial number e revision information e catalog number e vendor identification e error fault information e diagnostic counters By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 4 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Electronic Keying Instead of plastic mechanical backplane keys electronic keying allows the ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the various slots of a configured system During module configuration you must choose one of the following keying options for your I O module e Exact Match e Compatible Match e Disable Keying The options above are described later in this section When the controller attempts to connect to and configure an I O module e g after program download the module compares the following parameters before allowing the connection and configuration to be accepted e Vendor e Product Type e Catalog Number e Majo
262. the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Program Mode Off 6 11 Communications Failure in Disabled 6 11 Program Mode Fault Mode Off 6 11 Wiring example Use the following example to wire your module OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 RTN OUT DECOM 40182 M LED indicator G gt DC OUTPUT ST 01234567 9 K 6 Daisy chain to _______TPn 1 r NOTES 1 All terminals with the other RTBs pea ED ID same name are DC 0 i I connected together on Group 0 I D the module For example DC 0 I i DC COM can be I I connected to either J umper DC 0 d H terminal marked wire e RTN OUT 1 RTN OUT 0 j i 2 Do not physically connect 2 f e more than two wires to a DC 1 EB E single RTB terminal i f i When you daisy chain be B D from a group to another aol et k RTB always connect the Dent ie D daisy chain as shown i N DC 1 3 This wiring example i D shows a single voltage RTN OUT 1 ic i source 4 If separate power L sources are used do not
263. tic Surge Current Chart LED indicator DCO ue GDC OUTPUT 5V DH A 3 l t ic b a Continuous 30 C ST01234567 9 Wary a tee ee g sts9nunBus K CI i i Ai Ouro Continuous 60 C 6 Control Bus Interface E L 4 Display 0 Time 10ms 40457 M 30182 M 40849 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 43 1756 0B 161 Specifications Number of Outputs 16 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 350mA 5 1V dc amp 2 5mA 24V dc 1 8W Total backplane power Max Power Dissipation M odule 3 6W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 12 28 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30V dc Output Current Rating Per Point 2A max 30 C amp 1A max 60 C Linear derating Per Module 8A max 30 C amp 4A max 60 C Linear derating Surge Current Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s Minimum Load Current 1mA per point Max On State Voltage Drop 1 2V dc 2A Max Off State Leakage Current 0 5mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON Ims max ON to OFF 2ms max Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s max reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See
264. tified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D 3 M arked for all applicable directives Marked for all applicable acts N223 The commutating dv dt of the output vo tage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA OUTPUT TO L2 is 4V us maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range a resistor may be added across the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA I V R At 50mA and above the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for mthe output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at wr level installation manual Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industria gt ault Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 7 30 M odule Specific Information
265. tion Definition the Tag Editor or I O Data CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to 8 bytes indicate the time that data changed see COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOS Disable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenW ireEn FieldPwrLossEn Data Input data Off On status for the input point 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 On Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and 1 bit per point input data for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module will be faulted O no fault 1 fault OQpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault Standard Output Module Tags Tables A 3 to A 5 list and define all tags that may be used for ControlLogix standard digital output modules Output modules have three types of tags e configuration e input data e output data IM PORTANT The table below lists all possible standard output module tags In each application though the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Configuration Tags Table A 3 Standard Output M odule Configuration Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or I O Data FaultM ode Configuration Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue
266. tion in the ControlLogix System Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Chapter 2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes how digital I O modules work within the ControlLogix system Ownership gt Ta Using RSN etW orx and RSLogix 5000 2 2 Internal M odule Operations 2 4 Direct Connections 2 6 Input M odule Operation 2 9 Input M odules in a Local Chassis 2 10 Requested Packet Interval RPI 2 10 Change of State COS 2 10 Input M odules in a Remote Chassis 2 11 Output M odule Operation 2 14 Output M odules in a Local Chassis 2 14 Output M odules in a Remote Chassis 2 15 Listen Only M ode 2 17 M ultiple Owners of Input M odules 2 18 Configuration Changes in an Input M odule 2 19 with Multiple Owners Rack Connections 2 7 Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage 2 8 Chapter Summary and W hat s Next 2 20 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 2 2 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System Ownership Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Every I O module in the ControlLogix system must be owned by a Logix5550 Controller This owner controller e stores configuration data for every module that it owns e can be local or remote in regard to the I O module s position e sends the I O module configuration data to define the module s behavior and begin oper
267. tions Open Wire Loss of Power Off state leakage current 1 5mA minimum Transition range 46 to 85V ac Time Stamp of Diagnostics lms Change of State Software configurable Time stamp of Inputs 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User Selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEM A 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1N m Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 123 Screwdriver W idth for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Agency Certification when product or packaging is marked fh Listed Industrial Control Equipment Certified Process Control Equipment Certified Class Division 2 Group A B C D lt gt Approved Class Division 2 Group A B C D M arked for all applicable directives M arked for all applicable acts N223 1 Maximum wire size w
268. to configure the state of 1 bit per point outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue OFF or ON 1 Hold Last State FaultValue Configuration Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultM ode to configure the state of 1 bit per point outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultM ode O OFF 1 ON Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Using Software Configuration Tags A 5 Table A 3 Standard Output M odule Configuration Tags Name as listedin Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or I O Data ProgM ode Configuration Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state 1 bit per point of outputs when the controller is in Program M ode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue OFF or ON 1 Hold Last State ProgValue Configuration Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgM ode to configure the state 1 bit per point of outputs when the controller is in Program M ode See ProgM ode 0 0ff 1 On ProgToFaultEn Configuration Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transitioning of 1 byte per module outputs to FaultM ode if a communications failure occurs in Program M ode Otherwise outputs will remain in ProgramM ode See ProgM ode ProgValue FaultM ode FaultValue O outputs stay in ProgramM ode if comm failure 1 outputs got to FaultM ode if comm failure Input Data Tags Table A 4 Standard Output Module Input Data Tags Name as li
269. tor Starters 120V ac 60Hz Catalog Number Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter 1756 0A161 16 15 30 C 13 30 C 8 30 C 5 30 C 12 60 C 10 60 C 6 60 C 4 60 C 1756 0A16 16 14 4 None None Only 7 per group Only 2 per group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 30 C 5 30 C 6 60 C 4 60 C 1756 0A8D 8 8 8 None None 1756 OA8E 8 8 8 6 6 30 C Only 3 per group Only 3 per group 4 60 C Only 2 per group Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 D 2 Driving M otor Starters with ControlLogix Digital I O M odules Table D 2 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole M otor Starters 230V ac 60Hz Catalog Number Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter 1756 0A161 16 16 16 16 30 C 11 30 C 13 60 C 9 60 C 1756 0A16 16 16 16 4 2 Only 2 per group Only 1 per group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 8 Table D 3 Maximum Allow ed 2 3 Pole M otor Starter 24V ac 60H2 Catalog Number Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter 1756 ON8 4 30C 4 30C None None None 3 60 C 3 60 C Determining the Maximum Number of M otor Starters To determine the maximum number of motor starters that can be used by a particular 1756 catalog number refer to the following example
270. ture cannot be disabled for diagnostic output modules If any of the three events described above occurs the output module sends new data to the owner controller ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules multicast fault status data to any owner listening controllers All diagnostic input modules maintain a Module Fault Word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions as shown on the next page The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred e Module Fault Word This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital input modules e Field Power Loss Word This word indicates loss of field power to a group on the module It s tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is only available on 1756 IA8D For more information on field power loss see page 4 16 e Open Wire Word This word indicates the loss of a wire from a point on the module It s tag name is OpenWire For more information on open wire see page 4 15 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 4 26 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odule Features Bit 31 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits bits 0
271. u will be alerted in one of three Troubleshoot Your Module ways e Warning signal on the main screen next to the module This occurs when the connection to the module is broken e Message in a screen s status line e Notification in the Tag Editor General module faults are also reported in the Tag Editor Diagnostic faults are only reported in the Tag Editor e Status on the Module Info page The screens below display fault notification in RSLogix 5000 Warning signal on main screen eter year ge perenne gar ai e pe i cH 1 0 Configuration A 0 1756 ENET B ENET f 2 17561B16D DIAG_INPUT f 4 1756 OB16D DIAG_OUTI f 5 1756 CNB B CONTROLS fh 9 1756 MO24E MOTION Warning signal The module in slot 9 has faulted Warning icon when a communications fault occurs or if the module is inhibited Fault message in status line E Module Properties Local 9 1756 MO2AE 3 1 xi m Identification m Status Vendor Allen Bradley Major Fault None Product Type General Motion Control Minor Fault None Product Code 1756 MO24E Internal State 16 0030 unknown Revision Serial Number Configured No Product Name 1756M024E Owned No Module Identity Mismatch Coordinated System Time re Timer Hardware Timer Sync ed y Refresh Reset Module Status line provides information on the module s fault and on the connection Status Faulted Cancel for Heb to the module Publicati
272. ule Specific Information 7 49 1756 OB 8El Specifications Number of Outputs 8 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 250mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 1 30W M ax Power Dissipation M odule 4 7W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 16 03 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30V dc Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 10A maximum 60 C amp 16A maximum 55 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s Minimum Load Current 3mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 2V dc 2A Max Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON Ims maximum ON to OFF 5ms maximum Diagnostic Functions Short trip gt 4 5A for 500us maximum Output ON then short Time stamp of diagnostics gt 4 5A for 1 5ms maximum Output ON into short Ims Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Fusing Electronically fused per point Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program M ode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User side to system side 100 tested at 254
273. um for 240V ac inductive output 2A steady state 5 30V dc 0 5A steady state 48V dc 0 25A steady state 125V dc 2A steady state 15A make 125V ac 2A steady state 15A make 240 V ac 60VA maximum for 30V dc inductive output 24VA maximum for 48V dc inductive output 31VA maximum for 125V dc inductive output Maximum Off State OmA Fusing None Fused IFM is recommended to protect Leakage Current outputs See pub 1492 2 12 Output Delay Time Environmental Conditions Off to on 13ms maximum Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F On to off 13ms maximum Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Configurable Fault States Hold Last State ON or OFF Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum per Point OFF is the default reference to the CST Configurable States in Program M ode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4N m maximum Module Keying Software configurable Screwdriver Blade Width 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Backplane for RTB RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Conductors Agency Certification T i Wire Size 22 14 gauge 2mm stranded when product or Uy j Listed Industrial Control Equipment 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum packaging is marked Certified Process Control Equipment Category 12
274. v eres L1 14 o 29 OUT 14 ocal Rockwell Automation 11 15 Fels af OUT 15 if sales representative to order 1o L1 15 u ud Not sed additional jumper bars me p sie onnee O if necessary Not used 1 136 35 G Not used E 4 If separate power sources are an used do not exceed the 4 specified isolation voltage Daisy chain to other RTBs 30244 Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator 5V L1 0 20A gt AC OUTPUT 3 EE ST012345670 X A sT 89 pues LI Fa ay Conti 30 E OUuT 0 2A Pees k 6 1A Continuous 60 C Control Bus Interface Display 0 43ms 41161 M Time 40847 M 40459 M Publicati on 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Module Specific Information 7 31 1756 0A16l Specifications Number of Outputs 16 individually isolated M odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 300mA 5 1V dc amp 2 5mA 24V dc Total backplane power 1 60W M ax Power Dissipation M odule 5 5W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 18 76 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Poi Per Module 2A max 30 C amp 1A max 60 C Linear derating 5A max 30 C amp 4A max 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C M inimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak 2A amp 6V peak load current lt
275. went 7 16 TGR ELON ett ie a a Saree gen bys at E aa e 7 18 TOO IMIG sacs hk cars eee as Aes he 7 20 DT OUI G sg ssn Gch 2h ul FA Sond hte se Se we hhc ee em hit oa 7 22 175GW1Gs4h gases ae eee eka were ee aT E 7 24 1750 V32 ae ae ee EE er Se ce wae eee a my ae Ga 7 26 TSO ORIG Gest teh ob ee beet ee Bh Gras a ots 8 Bn 7 28 TBO AIG as ante a a e A a echt pecan acne GG 7 30 TV GOO AG ask da Mea eects aerate pace eee ar eared 7 32 TBO OAC aire spd ec cera he be ad kG 9 hie a alindes a Gs 7 34 T700 OABE tr 2h Stee asics a As Bseng pa Pw be pice ease HS 7 36 1756 0 BT6D scat aria can ewik oak giles aioe ow bse a 7 38 T790 ODIGE 332025 ina e tesa e nthe tae ue eee 7 40 Troubleshooting Your Module Using Software Configuration Tags Using Ladder Logic Table of Contents v 1756 0 BIOI mei eaa ooo a ie Goede ee 7 42 TPO OB B25 e norna EEE a Ry E O yale mn gh cee 7 44 17500 BGs sretni south Kale ahve a1 Seager aa oat 7 46 1756 OB8EI oops cos sec cso ry aich hy oh sb fy ash he teal sy hy ste este ob b s 7 48 17000 CO cheats uta yure he wea eas oa ee ee aces 7 50 T756 Q Ol otek venience Saree gi aes vse ainsi 7 52 TSO ONDA aces hk aba e as Ae a ee 7 54 TOO LOE 26 925 ois FS nd Se hte cng Se wy Sh he ed te a ity Coo 7 56 17 5O OWAGI e a Sice rotor ocak ee wea aeerb Ea oma eh ere 7 58 1750 OP 40 Meee Cane er ee ee ORE ane Gere ree E eran are ea 7 60 Chapter Summary and What s Next 7 62 Chapter 8 What This Chapter Contains
276. width Rack optimization A communications format in which the 1756 CNB module collects all digital I O words in the remote chassis and sends them to controller as a single rack image Remote connection An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules in a remote chassis Removal and insertion under power RIUP ControlLogix feature that allows a user to install or remove a module or RTB while power is applied Removable Terminal Block RTB Field wiring connector for I O modules Requested packet interval RPI The maximum amount of time between broadcasts of 1 0 data Run mode Controller program is executing Inputs are actively producing data Outputs are actively controlled Service A system feature that is performed on user demand such as fuse reset or diagnostic latch reset System side Backplane side of the interface to the I O module Tag A named area of the controller s memory where data is stored Timestamping ControlLogix process that stamps a change in input data with a relative time reference of when that change occurred Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Preface 4 Related Products and Documentation Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 The following table lists related ControlLogix products and documentation Table Preface C Related Documentation Catalog Document title Pub number number 17
277. wing screen shows examples of the tags used in the ladder logic as they appear in the tag editor Controller Tags cst1 controller Oy x Scope esti controller x Show Show Al x Sort Tag Name z These tags were created for this ladder logic Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Description always_on BOOL Decim init BOOL Decim DINT 2 Decim LastT imestamp 0 DINT Decim LastT imestamp 1 DINT Decim Local 0 C ABT Local 0 1 AB 17 Local 1 C AB 17 Local 1 1 ABT 4 Local 1 0 AB 17 Time_at_which_Input_Changed_O Local 0 1 CSTTimestamp 0 LocakO 1 C DINT Decim D Time_at_which_Input_Changed_1 Locak0 CSTTimestamp 1 Local0 1 C DINT Decim D Time_at_which_Output_will_Change Local 1 0 CSTTimestamp 0 Local 1 0 DINT Decim C z Monitor Tags SESE TZ Rungs O and 1are used to perform a reset fuse service on Bits 0 and 1 respectively of a1756 OA8D module in slot 4 Rung 2 performs a pulse test service to slot 4 Rung 3 moves the results of the pulse test to a data storage location The actual results appear in the message instruction tags under the tag name EXERR Rung 4 performs a reset latched diagnostics service to slot 4 This example shows an output module These tags were created for this ladder logic
278. wires to a single RTB GND 1 E 9G IN 4 terminal When you daisy chain GND 1 ney 22 ug IN 5 Group 1 from a group to other RTBs away GND 1 Jay 4 314 IN 6 connect the daisy chain as shown ye GND 1 16 15 4 IN 7 3 This wiring example shows a single J umper GND 2 7l 18 17 IN 8 voltage source wires Xs GND 2 e z2 19 1 IN 9 4 Resistors are not necessary if Wire 2 iS 15kQ 1 4W Group 2 Off diagnostic is not used ane g f 2 i P 5 resistor 5 If separate power sources are ET on do reeked the specified oes pias Mi isolation voltage GND 3 Tep 28 27 Me GND 3 30 29 IN Group 3 To Determine Leakage Resistor GND 3 16 32 2 G P S Field side power supply GND 3 gla 331 Not used RieaxMaximum P S Voltage 4 6V dc 1 21mA Not used 1E 36 35 Not used RyeaxMinimum P S Voltage 5V dc 1 5mA Recommended Values P S Voltage Rigax 1 4W 2 12V de 45 323k DC COM 40203 M 24V de 5 14 3kQ Simplified schematic Input 5V LED indicator W 3 ERR i Control Bus 4 DC INPUT VV T t l J Interface Display 3 s T S V K ST01234567 7 m o1234567 of if t i sTagpunBus GND Y s Sn ee ae on i a GND DIAGNOSTIC 40203 M Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Open wire 30346 M Module Specific Information 7 11 1756 IB 16D Specifications Number of Inputs 16 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 150mA 5 1V dc amp 3mA 24V dc Total back
279. with the input module Whichever controller s configuration data arrives first establishes a connection When the second controller s data arrives the module compares it to its current configuration data the data received and accepted from the first controller If the configuration data sent by the second controller matches the data sent by the first controller that connection is also accepted If any parameter of the second configuration data is different from the first the module rejects the connection and the user is informed by an error in the software or programatically via a ladder logic program The advantage of multiple owners over a Listen mode connection is that now either of the controllers can break the connection to the module and the module will continue to operate and multicast data to the system because of the connection maintained by the other controller Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 19 Configuration Changes in You must be careful when changing an input module s configuration data in a multiple owner scenario When the configuration data is an Input M odule w ith changed in one of the owners for example Controller A and sent to M ultiple Ow ners the module that configuration data is accepted as the new configuration for the module Controller B will continue to listen unaware that any changes have been made in the module s behavior Multiple Ow ners with Changed Configuration Data i
280. x 5000 To see these screens in use see page 8 4 After the naming page this screen appears Mocha Propedlics Leca 1756 1 1 Adjust the Requested Packet Interval here 5spsssi Piei Soie plo iil Inhibit the connection to the module here oF jaita iiciin If you want a M ajor Fault on the F haa Fant On Crete 6 Carne Fas hein Fan da Controller to occur if there is Mocks Faak connection failure with the 1 0 n modulercliekher lt This Fault box is empty when you are offline If a fault occurs while the module is online the type of fault will be displayed here l Cmo omet O e e Click here to move to the next page Mecele Prapen Locat i 175604 1 1 danikan Cane Werner Hag aA Product Type Miri Fist Product Corder biera Shader Fangai This screen is used during online Be Tes monitoring but not initial configuration Coorckeated Sateen Tires 5 7 Tma Hache weai clack rats russ he Click here to move to the next page Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 6 11 The configuration page appears next For example this screen appears for the 1756 OA8 module The choices available on the configuration screen will vary according to the module selected Models Propose Set the state of the outputs in i 7 Setthe state of Program M ode mE the outputs in I Fault Mode Communications Failure in Program M ode
281. x Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 3 22 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O M odule Features Notes Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P March 2001 Chapter 4 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes devices compatible with Controllogix I O and features that are specific to various modules Determining Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility For information about Determining Diagnostic Input M odule Compatibility See page 4 1 Determining Diagnostic Output M odule Compatibility 4 2 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O M odules 4 3 Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input M odules 4 14 Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Output M odules 4 17 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input M odules and Controllers 4 25 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output M odules and Controller 4 27 Chapter Summary and W hat s Next 4 29 ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect whether they are ON or OFF ControlLogix input modules convert ac or dc ON OFF signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor Typical input devices include e proximity switches e limit switches e selector switches e float switches e pushbutton switches Publication 1756 UM 05
282. ysically connect more IN 9 i ji i IN sl ot than two wires to a single RTB D terminal W hen you daisy chain N 11 em ZD IN 10 from a group to another RTB Bi NU Cani always connect the daisy chain N 13 IAS N 12 oup as shown J umper gt i jN wire YI This wiring example shows a single voltage source If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage 2 An ul Ti Nal 2 i P mS a U E N P D 40176 M Simplified schematic LED indicator Wi 5V F eum AC INPUT VVV ale gt of m aE 3 L2 0 a S y AE ie gt 3 a ia S ST012345670 S44 ST 89 DULBUB K GND gt l 8 Control Bus Display Interface 30338 M 20945 Publication 1756 UM 058C EN P M arch 2001 Module Specific Information 7 3 1756 1A 16 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 8 points common odule Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 105mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V dc Total backplane power 0 58W aximum Power Dissipation M odule 5 8W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 18 41 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 74 132V ac 47 63Hz Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac On State Curren 5mA 74V ac minimum 13mA 132V ac maximum aximum Off State Vol

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

口 取扱説明書 区  RETScreen - Photovoltaic Project Model  Untitled - Electro Depot  Savi 710-M/720-M  Installation  OM, PR17, PR17 AWD, PF21, PF21 AWD, 2008-11  RESTAURANTS - Communauté de Communes du Canton d`Arzacq  "user manual"  応募用紙[PDF:143KB]  DreamLine SHCM-23580 Installation Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file